Home

- &scaron;koda auto

1. E Economical and environmentally friendly driving 140 EDS 97 Electrical power windows Button in the driver s door 34 Electric power windows Central locking system 36 Electric sliding tilting roof 37 Electronic Differential Lock 97 Electronic immobiliser 92 Emergency Automatic gearbox 106 Changing a wheel 179 Hazard warning light system 44 Jump starting 185 locking of the doors 32 Selector lever unlocking 106 Sliding roof 38 Towing the vehicle 186 Tyre repair 182 Unlocking the boot lid 34 Emissions 197 Engine Running in 139 Starting and stopping the engine 91 Engine compartment Brake fluid 164 Coolant 162 Overview 160 Vehicle battery 165 Engine oil Capacity 200 Changing 162 Checking 161 Replenishing 161 Specification 200 Engine revolutions counter 9 Environment 140 Environmental compatibility 142 Index 209 Environmentally friendly driving 140 ESC Operating principle 95 Warning light 22 Ethanol E85 see fuel 157 F Fire extinguisher 178 First aid kit 178 Floor mats 97 Front airbag 130 Front seats 54 Fuel 135 Diesel 158 Ethanol E85 157 Fuel gauge 9 gauge 9 refer to Fuel 155 Refuelling 155 Unleaded petrol 156 Fuel consumption 140 Fuses Assignment 189 Replacing 189 G Gear Recommended gear 11 General view Cockpit Glow plug system Warning light 23 GSM 109 112 H Handbrake 95 H
2. q Open door page 20 _F_ Coolant temperature coolant level page 20 a gt Bonnet page 20 lt x Boot lid page 21 7 Engine oil page 21 i Q Q Electromechanical power steering page 21 Ls Traction control TCS page 21 Ls Electronic Stability Control ESC page 22 O Antilock brake system ABS page 22 QE Rear fog light page 22 os Bulb failure page 22 i Exhaust inspection system page 22 were Glow plug system diesel engine page 23 EPC EPC fault light petrol engine page 23 RP Diesel particle filter diesel engine page 23 FN Fuel reserve page 23 ey Airbag system page 24 Tyre control display page 24 Windscreen washer fluid level page 24 Traction control TCS switched off page 24 Turn signal left right page 24 Fog lights page 24 Speed regulating system page 25 Low beam page 25 Selector lever lock page 25 Main beam page 25 EJ warnine a If illuminated warning lights and the corresponding descriptions and warn ing notes are not observed this may result in severe injuries or major vehicle damage The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the engine compart ment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids It is essential to ob serve safety notes page 158 En
3. a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles Technical data 205 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 103 4000 EU4 e E 320 1750 2500 4 1968 Performances OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG6 COMBIMG6 COMBI DSG6 Be a SCOUTMG6 SCOUT DSG6 Top speed km h 211 209 210 208 204 203 199 197 Acceleration 0O 100 km h s 9 5 9 6 9 6 9 7 9 8 9 9 10 1 10 2 oo alle OnHOtEE Se 15009 1700 15002 1600 1700 16002 Permissible trailer load un 690 700 690 700 740 750 braked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 125 4200 350 1750 2500 4 1968 Performances OCTAVIA RS MG6 OCTAVIA RS DSG6 COMBI RS MG6 COMBI RS DSG6 Top speed km h 224 Acceleration O 100 km h s 8 3 8 4 Permissible trailer load braked kg 14002 1600 14002 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 650 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 206 Technical data Multi purpose vehicles AF Weight in kg Engine Maximum permissible gross weight 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI MG6 DSG7 1820 1845 1 4 1 59 kW MG5 1755 1 4 Itr 90 kW TSI MG6 1880 1 6 1 75 kW AG6 1870
4. Fig 155 Front bumper protective grille installing the towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 186 Remove the cap carefully as follows gt Insert your fingers into opening A Fig 155 gt By pulling in the direction of arrow 1 first of all undo the cover in the upper area on the side facing the fog light gt Afterwards undo the cover in the direction of arrow 2 on the other side too remove gt Manually insert the towing eye in the direction of arrow 3 until the stop tight en For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye Do it yourself 187 gt In order to reinstall the cap after unscrewing the towing eye first of all insert it starting on the side facing the marking Then press the cap on the side closest to the fog light The cap must engage firmly CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Fig 156 Front bumper Octavia RS Protective grille Octavia Scout Cap First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 186 Octavia RS gt Insert a finger into the opening A Fig 156 of the grille gt Unlock and remove the cap by pulling in the direction of arrow gt Manually insert the
5. Instrument cluster windscreen wiper lever and turn signal lever Air blower for heating and air conditioning Not assigned Towing device Seat heaters Auxiliary heating and ventilation Phone Light switch Fuses in the engine compartment Fig 159 Fuse box cover in engine compartment Schematic diagram of the fuse box First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 189 On some vehicles the battery cover must be removed before removing the cover for the fuse box page 167 gt The cover for the fuse box is removed by pushing the circlips A Fig 159 up wards as far as the stop The symbol is displayed behind the clip Now remove the cover gt Once the fuse has been removed place the cover on the fuse box and push the circlips A back as far as the stop The symbol is displayed behind the clip The cover is locked into position Fuse assignment in engine compartment No Power consumer F1 Not assigned F2 Control unit for automatic gearbox F3 Measuring circuit F4 Valves for ABS F5 Control unit for automatic gearbox F6 Instrument cluster windscreen wiper lever and turn signal lever F7 Power supply terminal 15 Starter F8 Radio F9 Not assigned Power consumer Engine control unit Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit Data bus control unit Engine control unit
6. 1 8 Itr 118 112 kW TSI 4x4 MG6 2010 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR 4x4 MG6 2015 1 9 1 77 kW TDI PD 4x4 MG6 2020 2 0 Itr 81 kW TDI CR DSG6 4x4 MG6 1970 2035 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR 4x4 MG6 4x4 DSG6 2035 2055 a The value corresponds to the status with the Green tec package Technical data 207 A ABS 96 Warning light 22 Accessories 177 Active steering support 95 Adjusting Exterior mirror 52 Adjusting seats 122 Adjustment Seat 55 Aerial 149 see Radio reception 151 Airbag 129 Deployment 129 Front airbag 130 Head airbag 132 Side airbag 131 Airbag system 129 Air conditioning system Air outlet vents 80 Climatronic 85 Manual air conditioning system 82 Alarm 31 Anti theft alarm system 31 Antilock brake system 96 Armrest Front 74 rear 60 75 Ashtray 68 Assistance systems ESC 95 Assist systems ABS 22 96 Cruise control systems CCS 99 EDS and XDS 97 ESC 22 208 Index Parking aid 98 START STOP 100 TCS 21 96 Auto Check Control 17 Automatic driving lamp control 40 Automatic gearbox 102 Dynamic shift programme 105 Emergency programme 106 Information for driving 102 Kickdown 105 Manual shifting of gears on the multifunction steering wheel 104 Parking 103 Selector lever emergency unlocki
7. The tyre wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents 172 General Maintenance Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type of tyre Tyres for example have the following inscription on their walls 195 65 R 15 91T What this means is Tyre width in mm Height width ratio in Code letter for the type of tyre Radial Diameter of wheel in inches Load index Speed symbol The following speed restrictions apply to tyres Speed symbol Permissible maximum speed 180 km h 190 km h 200 km h 210 km h 240 km h 270 km h 300 km h The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall possibly only on the in side of wheel e g DOT 20 12 means for example that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of 2012 The following must be observed if only one temporary spare wheel is availa ble page 173 Unidirectional tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 170 The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre The so specified running direction must absolutely be complied with Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip low noise Wear and tear and aquaplaning If in the event of a puncture it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre with out
8. gt about 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed Rigel If a door remains open or if the switch A is in the position the interior light Front door Warning light goes out after 10 minutes to prevent the battery from discharging i Note We recommend having these bulbs replaced by a SKODA specialist garage a The warning light is located in the lower door trim panel Fig 31 Fig 30 Interior lighting version 2 The warning light goes on every time the door is opened The light goes out about 10 minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning light E The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror Switching on gt Press the switch into position Fig 30 The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the boot lid Switching off E l The light goes out after switching on the ignition or within 30 seconds of closing gt Press the switch into position O Fig 30 all of the doors and the boot lid Operating with the door contact switch If a door or the boot lid remains open the light goes out within 2 minutes if the gt Press the switch into position Fig 30 ignition is switched off gt The same principles apply for interior lighting version 2 as for pa
9. CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Activating the windscreen wipers and washers ___ CSC 73PCStCti YS Automatic rear window wiper Combi 50 Headlight cleaning system 50 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades gt gt gt Replacing the rear window wiper blade 51 The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bonnet is closed If the intermittent wipe is switched on the intervals are also controlled depend ing on speed The rain sensor automatically regulates the break between the individual wiper strokes depending on the intensity of the rain The rear window is wiped once if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected After the windscreen wiper switches off each time or the ignition switches off for the third time the position of the windscreen wiper changes this counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers Top up with windscreen wiper fluid page 165 EI warnine a Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving page 51 Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating the windscreen beforehand Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front a The rain sensor only operates as a support The driver is not released from the responsibility to set the function of the
10. Fig 81 Rear seats Cover handle boot Unlock button After folding the rear armrest and cover up an opening in the seat backrest be comes visible through which the removable through loading bag with skis can be pushed The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passenger com partment or the boot gt Seats and Stowage 75 Opening from the passenger compartment gt You can fold down the armrest at the loop page 60 gt Pull the handle upwards to the stop Fig 81 A and fold the cover down Opening from the boot gt Push the unlock button 1 Fig 81 B down and fold the cover including the armrest forwards Closing gt Fold the cover and armrest upwards to the stop the lid must click into place Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing This is apparent as the red field above the unlocking button 1 Fig 81 B is not visible from the luggage compartment EI warnine The through loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are placed in a properly secured removable through loading bag page 76 Removable through loading bag Fig 82 Securing the through loading bag Loading gt Open the boot lid gt Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards page 75 Seat backrest with through loading channel gt Place the empty removable through loading bag in such a way that the end
11. The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the two outer rear seats can be heated electrically gt The seat heaters on the driver s and front passenger s seat can be switched on and regulated by pressing the button in the area of the symbol or Fig 43 Al gt The heaters on the left or right rear seats can be switched on and regulated by pressing the regulator s or Fig 43 By pressing the button once the heating is switched to the highest intensity level 3 which is indicated by all three of the warning lights in the switch lighting up With repeated pressing of the switch the intensity of the heating is down regula ted up to the switch off The intensity of the heating is indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights in the switch E WARNING If as an occupant you have a subdued pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabetes we recommend not to use the seat heating This can lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal If the seat heating is used we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the jour ney Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition l CAUTION a Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points to avo
12. Briefly switch on Opening the stop 2 or3 Desired tempera ture To the left up to the stop Optimal cooling 20r3 Activated Do not switch on Open and align to the roof Fresh air mode ventilation Desired position Switched off Do not switch on Opening a We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside Note Switching off gt Press the button lt s 4 Fig 89 on page 82again the warning light in the Controls A Fig 89 on page 82 B C and buttons 1 and 4 button goes out a Air outlet vents 3 Fig 86 on page 80 a We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 4 Fig 86 on page 80 in the opened position Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control Fig 89 on page 82 is turned to position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the button e EI warnine Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Recirculated air mode Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from ge
13. The dialogue is ended If the system does not recognise the command it repeats the first part of the help thus enabling a new entry to be completed After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of the aid After the 3rd error the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice entry for the contact in the menu Phone book Voice Tag Record Your own voice entry can also be saved using the voice control in the menu FUR THER OPTIONS Communication 117 The music playback process is performed on the connected device The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played back via the hands free system can be controlled with the remote control page 117 Voice commands GSM II The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music via i Note Bluetooth from devices such as MP3 players mobile phones or notebooks 1 1 1 To ensure the music can be played back via Bluetooth it is necessary to connect The device being connected must support the Bluetooth A2DP profile refer to the terminal device with the hands free system in the menu Phone Bluetooth the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected Media player The multifunction steering wheel comprises buttons for setting the basic fun
14. gt Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery gt If the engine does not start terminate the attempt to start the engine after 10 seconds and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the process gt Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described above 186 Do it yourself Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Fig 154 Jump starting START STOP system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 185 On vehicles with the START STOP system the jump start cable of the charger must never be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth Fig 154 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front towing eye __ 87 Front towing eye for Octavia RS and Octavia Scout 188 Rear towing eye 188 Vehicles with manual transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Vehicles with automatic transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the automatic gearbox is damaged A tow bar is the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available When towing the following guidelines must be observed Driver of the tow vehicle gt Release the clut
15. i Note Controls A Fig 88 on page 80 B c and the button 1 a Air outlet vents 3 Fig 86 on page 80 We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 4 Fig 86 on page 80 in the opened position DjA os bo pale Rats el e culate d alr mode Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam Switching on gt Press the button 1 Fig 88 on page 80 and the warning light in the but ton illuminates Switching off gt Press the button 1 Fig 88 on page 80again the warning light in the button goes out Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control Fig 88 on page 80 is in position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the button lt EI WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up 82 Using the system The cooling system only operates if the button AC 1 Fig 89 on page 82 is pressed and the following conditions are met gt engine running gt outside temperature above approx
16. page 122 Correct seated position a If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident a If there is a fault have the airbag system checked immediately by a KODA specialist garage Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of sys tem components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a SKODA specialist garage a Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork a It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci dent The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de ployed a The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life a If you sell your vehicle provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de activating the front passenger airbag must be included When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to comply with the national legal requirements When are the airbag
17. Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot ii A symbol in the information display indicates that the temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox is too high Instruments and warning lights 17 The following is displayed in the information display Gearbox overheated Stop Owner s man Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the symbol lt i disappears risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the symbol dis appears Problem with the engine oil pressure If the symbol A is shown in the information display you must have your vehicle checked immediately by a SKODA specialist garage The information about the maximum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol EJ WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 i Note As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always indica ted again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver Overview The warning lights show certain functions faults and may be accompanied by au dible signals Handbrake page 19 Brake system page 19 Seat belt warning light page 19 page 20 E Generator 18 Using the system
18. Fig 13 Further information page 33 Open close Folding out the key bit gt Press the button 4 Fig 13 Folding in the key bit gt Press the button 4 Fig 13 and fold in the key bit Unlocking The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un locked If the vehicle is unlocked using button 1 Fig 13 and none of the doors or the boot lid are opened within the next 30 seconds the vehicle is automatical ly locked again and the safe securing system or anti theft alarm system is reacti vated This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentional ly In addition when the car is unlocked the electrically adjustable seats and exteri or mirrors move into the position assigned to this key The stored setting of driver seat and exterior mirrors is retrieved Locking The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly locked If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed EJ warninec If the car is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is activated there must not be any person in the car as it is then not possible to open ei ther a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more diffi cult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard it Note Only operate the remote control when the door
19. Front centre console Stowage compartment gt Press on the bottom part of the storage compartment in the area A Fig 72 and the lid folds open F WARNING The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes risk of fire Storage net in the front centre console Fig 73 Front centre console Storage net E WARNING Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0 5 kg in the storage net Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the storage net as they can damage the storage net E TOMS Detail of the headliner Glasses storage box Fig 74 Front seat rests Map pockets r aT gt Press on the cover of the glasses storage box the compartment folds down Fig 75 F warnine The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spec Map pockets are located on the rear of the seat backrests Fig 74 tacles and otherwise must be kept closed The map pockets are intended for storage of maps magazines etc l CAUTION EJ wARNING Do not put any heat sensitive objects in the glasses storage box they may be Never put heavy items in the map pockets risk of injury damaged l CAUTION Do not put any large items such as bottles or sharp objects into the map pockets as the pockets and the seat covers could be damaged Fig 76 Storage compartme
20. Retrieving the seat and exterior mirror settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 54 Retrieving settings via the memory button gt One touch automatic memory briefly press the desired memory button Fig 42 on page 56 The seat and exterior mirror are moved automatically into the stored positions this applies only if the ignition is switched on and the speed is less than 5 km h gt Memory buttons Press and hold the desired memory button B until the seat and the exterior mirrors are moved into the stored positions Retrieving settings via the remote control key gt If the driver s door is closed and the ignition is switched off briefly press the button 3 on the remote control key and open the driver s door The seat and exterior mirrors now move automatically into the stored positions Retrieving setting of exterior mirror for reversing gt Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror setting into the position R page 52 before engaging the reverse gear gt Engage reverse gear The mirror returns into its initial position after the rotary knob is moved out of the position R and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km h Emergency Off The setting process for the seats and exterior mirrors can be interrupted if neces sary by pressing any button on the driver s seat Seat heaters Fig 43 Regulator for heating the front seats rear seats
21. Tyre pressure monitoring system Depending on equipment fitted gt Ashtrays gt Storage compartment Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag ___ hin Note The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items on right hand drive models may differ from that shown in Fig 1 The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left hand drive models Cockpit 43 44 160 71 92 93 80 85 96 98 97 103 175 68 72 133 7 This chapter contains information on the following subjects amp 0 P 5 41 si r N Oba 22 w LEFT CLA Overview 8 g WA a Engine revolutions counter 9 Cheat ta VQ Xx w S Speedometer 9 Coolant temperature gauge 9 Fuel gauge 9 Counter for distance driven 10 Service Interval Display 10 Fig 2 Instrument cluster Digital clock 11 Recommended gear 11 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 p WARNING 1 Engine revolutions counter page 9 Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re 2 Speedometer page 9 sponsible for the operation of your vehicle 3 Coolant temperature gauge page 9 Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving only 4 Display when the vehicle is stationary i k 8 Using the system With counter for distance driven page 10 With serv
22. Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right in the opposite direction to the arrow Introductory information When using the central locking and unlocking system all the doors and the fuel filler flap are locked or unlocked at the same time if it was not set differently in the menu item Settings Convenience of the information display The boot lid is unlocked when opening Warning light in the driver s door After locking the vehicle the warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system page 28 is not operating the warning light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds If the warning light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds afterwards lights up for about 30 seconds without interruption and then flashes slowly there is a fault in the system of the central locking or in the interior monitor and in the tow ing protection monitoring page 32 Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Convenience operation of windows The windows can be opened and closed when unlocking and locking the vehi cle page 36 Individual settings Opening a single door This selection function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The oth er doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlock
23. display is restored Door boot lid and bonnet warning First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 If at least one door is open or the boot or bonnet is open the information display indicates the relevant open door or boot bonnet An audible signal also sounds if the vehicle is travelling at more than 6 km h Auto Check Control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 Vehicle condition Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked contin uously when the ignition is switched on and also while driving Some error messages and other information are displayed in the information dis play The messages are displayed at the same time as the symbols in the informa tion display or the warning lights in the instrument cluster page 18 If there is at least one error message the menu item Vehicle status is displayed in the menu After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is dis played Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e g 1 3 This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being dis played Warning symbols Engine oil pressure too low page 21 Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot Check engine oil level engine oil sensor faulty page 17 page 21 Problem with engine oil pressure page 18
24. gt Press in the button of the cigarette lighter Fig 66 gt Wait until the button pops forward gt Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use gt Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket FJ warnine Take care when using the cigarette lighter Improper use of the cigarette lighter can cause burns The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn Therefore never leave children unattended in the ve hicle Ria Note The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12Volt socket for electrical ap pliances page 70 12 volt power socket a Further information page 177 Accessories changes and replacement of parts a Seats andStowage 69 12 volt power socket Fig 67 Boot Power socket Overview of the 12 volt power socket In the front centre console Fig 66 on page 69 In the boot Fig 67 Using the power socket gt Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter or open the cover for the power socket gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket Further information page 177 Accessories changes and replacement of parts E WARNING Improper use of the 12 volt power socket and the electrical accessories can cause fires burns and other serious injuries Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The 12 volt power socket and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ig
25. standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel In the winter only use diesel fuel which complies with the standard EN 590 standard DIN 51628 in Germany standard ONORM C 1590 in Austria GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 in Russia Winter grade diesel fuel will still operate properly even at a temperature of 20 C It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic The SKODA Service Partners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with infor mation regarding the diesel fuels available Preheating fuel The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system This secures operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of 25 C Fuel additives Fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar products must not be added to the diesel fuel CAUTION a Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the stand ard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and exhaust sys tem a f a different fuel other than diesel fuel which complies to the above mentioned standards e g petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition Extensive damage to engine parts can occur We reco
26. 1 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi gation system menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system 2 This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system 112 Using the system Media player Active device Paired devices Search Phone name the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit pre set SKODA UHV Settings The following menu items can be selected in the menu Settings Phone book Update List Surname First name Ring tone Back Return in the Start menu of the telephone Introductory information The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II hands free system includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steering wheel the radio or navigation system The universal telephone preinstallation GSM III comprises the following functions gt Phone Phonebook page 109 gt Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel page 108 gt Operation of the telephone via the information display page 114 gt Voice control of the telephone page 116 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 118 gt Internet connection page 115 gt Display of SMS messages page 114 All communication between a telephone and the hands free system of your vehi cle can only b
27. 1535 1508 a Applies to vehicles with the LOOK RS package b Applies to vehicles with a 1 8 1 112 kW TSI engine AGE Applies to vehicles with a rough road package 4 Applies to vehicles with a SPORT package 1528 1508 1541 1514 1531 1500 1535 1508 1528 1508 1541 1514 Technical data 1531 1500 199 Specifications and engine oil capacity The engine has been factory filled with a high grade oil that can be use through out the year except in extreme climate zones Various oils can be mixed together when refilling However this does not apply to vehicles with flexible service intervals Engine oils are of course undergoing continuous further development Thus the information stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publica tion SKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by SKODA We therefore recommend that the oil change is completed by a SKODA Service Part ner The specifications VW standards stated in the following can be indicated sepa rately or together with other specifications on the bottle The oil capacities include oil filter change Check the oil level when filling do not over fill The oil level must be between the markings page 161 Specifications and capacity in l for vehicles with flexible service intervals Petrol engines Specification Filling level 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI VW 504 00 1 4 1 59 kW VW 503 00 VW 504 0
28. 155 Only valid for vehicles with the 1 6 75 kW MultiFuel engine Biofuel Ethanol E85 consists of 85 bioethanol and 15 unleaded petrol com plying with the standard DIN EN 228 Biofuel Ethanol E85 in accordance with the standard DIN EN 228 can be mixed in any desired ratio with unleaded petrol Drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes without interruption if biofuel Ethanol E85 has been refuelled so that the engine control unit can determine the share of the biofuel in the fuel During this period do not drive at top speed of your ve hicle or high engine speeds and not at full throttle During this process decrease the idling speed Operation in winter If you use biofuel Ethanol E85 at very low temperatures it is necessary to preheat the engine before an engine start The power socket for the engine preheating is located in the front bumper next to the fog light Fig 130 The outside temperature Duration of engine preheating We recommend up to 1 hour Below 10 C Below 15 C Below 25 C at least 1 hours at least 2 hours If an engine preheating is not possible at outside temperatures below 10 C the share of unleaded petrol complying with EN 228 must be as high as possible Thus the cold start property of the engine is clearly improved If there is biofuel Ethanol E85 in the tank and the engine is not preheated it can lead at temperatures below 15 C to very poor or no starting of t
29. 181 170 179 174 170 172 172 171 176 173 176 176 36 151 34 151 165 165 165 Windscreen washer system Windscreen wipers Windscreen wiper Automatic rear window wiper Combi Replacing the rear window wiper blade Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Windscreen wipers Activating Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades Windscreen washer fluid Winter operation Snow chains Winter tyres see Wheels and tyres X XDS 165 49 50 5I 49 51 165 176 176 97 Index 213 SKODA pursues a policy of constant product and model development We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time The information about appear ance performances dimensions weight standards and functions of the vehicle is correct at the time of publication Certain items of equipment might only be in Stalled at a later date information provided by your local SKODA Service Partner or are only offered in particular markets It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner s Manual Reprinting reproduction or translation either in whole or in part is not permitted without the written consent of SKODA SKODA expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws Subject to change Issued by KODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO a s 2012
30. 2 C gt blower switch switched on positions 1 to 4 Under certain circumstances air at a temperature of about 5 C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on Lengthy and uneven distribu tion of the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature for ex ample when getting out of the vehicle can result in chills in sensitive persons i Note We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a KODA specialist garage once every year AIRBAG Fig 89 The air conditioning system Control elements Setting temperature gt Turn the control dial A Fig 89 to the right to increase the temperature gt Turn the control dial A to the left to decrease the temperature Controlling blower gt Turn the blower switch B Fig 89 into one of the positions 1 to 4 to switch the blower on gt Turn the blower switch B into position O to switch the blower off gt Press the button lt s 4 to close the fresh air supply Fig 89 Regulating the air distribution gt The direction of the inlet air flow is controlled with air distribution regulator Fig 89 page 80 Switching the cooling system on and off gt Press the button A0 1 Fig 89 and the warning light in the button illumi nates gt When you again press the button AC the air conditioning system is switched off The warning light in the button goes out Rear window heater gt Press
31. Assistants page 41 Vehicle status page 17 Settings page 16 The menu items Audio and Navigation are only displayed when the factory fitted radio or navigation system is switched on The menu item Aux heating is only displayed if a factory fitted auxiliary heating is installed The menu point Assistants is only then displayed if the vehicle is fitted with cor nering lights Note a If warning messages are shown in the information display these messages must be confirmed with the button B Fig 7 on the windscreen wiper lever or with the button D on the multifunction steering wheel to call up the main menu a f the information display is not activated at that moment the menu always shifts to one of the higher levels after approx 10 seconds Settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 You can change certain settings by means of the information display The current setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top be low the line The following information can be selected depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle Language MFD Data Convenience Lights amp Vision Time Winter tyres Units Assistants Alternative speed displayed 16 Using the system Service Factory setting Back Select the menu item Back to return to one level higher in the menu Language You can set th
32. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 122 To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an ac cident the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following gt Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head B Fig 110 on page 123 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 125 Seat belts gt Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi cle page 135 Transporting children safely Passive Safety 123 Examples of an incorrect seated position First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 122 Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an in correct routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and pas sengers especially children Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following list contains examples of which seated positions can cause serious injuries or death This list is not complete however we would like you to familiar ise yourself with this subject Therefore while the car is moving never gt stand up in the vehicle gt
33. H on page 99 Storing a speed gt Turn the switch A Fig 100 into the ON position gt After the desired speed has been reached press the rocker button B into the SET position After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET the speed you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator Changing a stored speed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 99 Increasing the speed with the accelerator gt Depress the accelerator to increase the speed gt Release the accelerator to reduce the speed back down to the preset speed However if the saved speed is exceeded by more than 10 km h for a period of more than 5 minutes by depressing the accelerator the stored speed is deleted from the memory You have to re store the desired speed Starting off and Driving 99 Increasing the speed with the rocker button gt Press the rocker button B Fig 100 on page 99 into the RES position gt The speed will increase continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held in the RES position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory Decreasing the speed gt The stored speed can be reduced by pressing the rocker button B Fig 100 on page 99 into the position SET gt The speed will decrease continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held i
34. Ignition Lambda probe glow plug system Vehicle voltage control unit right headlight right tail light Horn Amplifier for the digital sound processor Windscreen wipers Coolant pump valve for fuel dosing Lambda probe Clutch pedal switch brake pedal switch Secondary air pump air mass meter fuel high pressure pump Active charcoal filter exhaust gas recirculation valve radiator fan Pump for ABS Vehicle voltage control unit left headlight left tail light Secondary air pump glow plug system Not assigned Power supply terminal 30 Terminal X 4 In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Headlights 192 Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light 193 Changing light bulbs for front parking lights and low beam 193 Changing the bulb for the main beam 194 Fuses and light bulbs 191 Fog lights and daytime running lights 194 Fog lights Octavia RS Octavia Scout S95 Changing the bulb for the licence plate light 195 Tail lamp assembly 196 Taillight Combi 96 Some manual skills are required to change a bulb For this reason if uncertain we recommend that bulbs are replaced by a SKODA specialist garage or other expert help is sought gt Switch off
35. Introductory information Your fuel consumption any pollution of the environmental and the wear and tear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on three factors gt your personal style of driving gt the conditions under which your vehicle is operated gt technical aspects The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 15 by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver s control Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult condi tions on poor roads etc Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer s data as a result of outside temperatures the weather and driving style The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the ve hicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works KODA places a partic ular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness 140 Driving Tips The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating in order to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle Looking ahead when driving A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating therefore unnec essary accelerating and braking should be avoided If looking ahead when driv
36. Minimisation of fuel consumption and CO emissions Recyclability Start stop system All models currently in production homologised Recovery in conformity with the requirements for recyclability Indication of recommended gear EU Directive 2005 64 EC Use of recyclable environmentally friendly materials Weight reduction Use of recycled materials with the parameters of the Optimisation of high strength panels reduction EAM NDE Al PORTERS easy Replacement of spare wheel with tyre repair kit Reduction of energy consumption Use of energy saving electromechanical steering instead of hydraulic type Optimisation of efficiency of generators Optimisation of operating consumption and electrical current consumption Optimisation of aerodynamic and rolling resistance Additional aerodynamic spoilers Additional covers at rack CD covers Optimised cooling input grid additional seal Reduction by 15 mm with frame Ro Wi tyres wheels with low rolling resistance The green seal represents SKODA AUTO commitment to environmentally responsible behaviour realised in the GreenLine series it expresses responsible engagement towards the environment and sustainable development www skoda auto com You also can do something for the environment The fuel consumption of your SKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive The noise and the wear of the vehicl
37. Multifunction display onboard computer ___ MAXI DOT information display Warning lights Unlocking and locking Vehicle key Child safety lock Central locking system Remote control Anti theft alarm system Boot lid Electric power windows Electric sliding tilting roof Lights and visibility Lights Interior light Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear window Seats and Stowage Front seats Seat heaters Head restraints Rear seats Boot 30 31 33 34 37 39 39 45 47 48 51 54 54 57 58 59 60 Variable loading floor in the boot 64 Net partition Combi 65 Roof rack system 66 Cup holder 68 Ashtray 68 Cigarette lighter 12 volt power socket 69 Storage compartments 70 Clothes hooks 77 Parking ticket holder 77 Heating and air conditioning system 79 Heating and air conditioning system 79 Air outlet vents 80 Heating 80 Air conditioning system manual air conditioning system 82 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system 85 Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation 87 Starting off and Driving 91 Starting and stopping the engine 91 Brakes and brake assist systems 93 Shifting manual gearbox 97 pedals 97 Parking aid 98 Cruise control system CCS 99 START STOP 100 Automatic gearbox 102 Automatic gearbox 102 Communication 107 Mobile phones and two w
38. Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns a Never use a damaged vehicle battery risk of explosion Replace a damaged vehicle battery immediately CAUTION a The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off otherwise the vehicle s electrical system electronic components can be dam aged When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system first of all dis connect the negative terminal of the battery Then disconnect the positive ter minal a When connecting the battery to the electrical system first connect the positive terminal of the battery Then connect the negative terminal Under no cir cumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly risk of a cable fire a Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork risk of damage to the paintwork a Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle battery housing from the effects of ultra violet light a f the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks the battery will discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity e g control units also in idle state Prevent the battery from discharging by discon necting the battery s negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current a f the vehicle is frequently used for making shor
39. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard Note a The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if the safe securing system is deactivated The interior monitor is however not activa ted a After locking the vehicle you will be informed that the safe securing system is activated by means of the message CHECK DEADLOCK on the instrument cluster display On vehicles that are equipped with an information display the following message will appear Check deadlock Owner s manual appears Unlocking the vehicle using the key Fig 11 Turning the key for unlocking and locking the vehicle B1zZ 0274 gt Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the direction of travel unlock position A Fig 11 gt Pull the door handle and open the door gt All the doors only the driver s door on vehicles with anti theft alarm system and the fuel filler flap are unlocked gt The boot lid is then unlocked gt The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact gt The safe securing system is deactivated gt The windows open while the key is held in the unlock position gt The warning light in the driver door stops flashing if the car is not fitted with an anti theft alarm system page 31 Ky Note If the vehicle is equipped with an anti theft alarm system you must insert the key into the ignition lock and switc
40. accident CAUTION Only use roof rack systems approved by KODA a f other roof rack systems are used or if the roof bars are not fitted correctly any resulting damage to the vehicle is not covered by the warranty It is therefore essential that the supplied fitting instructions for the roof rack system are ob served a On models fitted with a power sliding tilting roof ensure that the opened slid ing tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof a Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened a The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it Compare the vehicle height with available clear ances such as underpasses and garage doors a Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash a Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption Note If the vehicle is not factory equipped with a roof rack it can be purchased from the SKODA Original Accessories Attachment points Fig 62 Attachment points for roof bars First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 66 Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions CAUTION Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the e
41. according to the in structions a Always store care products in a safe place out of the reach of children risk of poisoning a When washing your vehicle in the winter Water and ice in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off risk of accident Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims risk of cuts a Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature inside the vehicle is high CAUTION Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible Stains on the material leather panels and textiles a Cleaners containing solvents can damage the material being cleaned Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight risk of paint damage a If washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high pressure cleaner en sure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the door panel joints risk of freezing a Do not use any insect sponges rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod ucts risk of damaging the surface of paintwork Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows the rear side win dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the window aerial These may get damaged With regard to the antenna they may in terfere w
42. and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down XDL only for Octavia RS XDL is an extension to the electronic differential lock XDL does not respond to traction but to the relief of the inner front wheel during fast cornering The active brake intervention on the brake of the inner wheel prevents it from spinning Thus the traction is improved and the vehicle continues to follow the desired track Shifting manual gearbox Fig 98 The shift pattern 5 speed or 6 speed manual gearbox Always depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gear to prevent excessive wear of the clutch The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 11 Recom mended gear Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before reverse gear is engaged to avoid any shift noises The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the igni tion is on EJ warnine Never engage reverse gear when driving risk of accident Note If not in the process of changing gear do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mecha nism to wear excessively pedals The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances In the driver s footwell only a foo
43. at a high speed to offer additional protection in the event of an accident The airbag system according to vehicle equipment consists of gt an electronic control unit gt Front airbags for the driver and front seat passenger page 130 gt side airbags page 131 gt head airbags page 132 gt an airbag warning light in the instrument cluster page 24 gt a key switch for the front seat passenger airbag page 133 gt an warning light in the middle of the dash panel to indicate the front seat pas senger airbag is switched off page 133 A fault in the airbag system exists if gt the warning light 2 does not illuminate when the ignition is switched on gt the warning light 2 does not go out 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on gt the warning light 2 goes out and comes on again after the ignition is switched on gt the warning light 2 comes on or flashes when driving gt the warning light in the middle of the dash panel for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag flashes EJ warnine The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but instead forms part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is fas tened TO ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size
44. been switched on The following is displayed in the information display Service now Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval You can use the button 5 to display the remaining distance and the days until the next service interval Fig 2 on page 8 A key symbol gt lt and the remaining distance appear for 10 seconds in the display At the same time the remaining days until the next service interval are displayed On vehicles which are equipped with the information display you can call up this display in the menu Settings page 16 The following will be displayed in the information display for 10 seconds Service in km or days Resetting Service Interval Display It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display if a service message or at least a pre warning is shown in the instrument cluster display We recommend that this reset is completed by a SKODA specialist garage The SKODA specialist garage gt Resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection gt Adds an entry to the Service Schedule gt Affixes the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the dashboard on the driver s side Reset the service interval display by using the knob 5 Fig 2 on page 8 On vehicles which are equipped with the information display you can reset the Service Interval Display in the menu Settings page 16 CAUTION We recommend that you
45. brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever out of the position N if the lever is in this position for longer than 2 seconds into the position D or R when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km h or the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched on D Position for driving forward normal programme When the selector lever is in this position the forward gears are automatically shifted up and down in line with the engine load vehicle speed and dynamic shift programme The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever into position D from Nwhen the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km h or is stationary Under certain circumstances e g when driving in mountainous regions or when towing a trailer it may be beneficial to select the manual shift pro gramme page 104 for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manual ly to the driving situations S Position for driving forward sports programme Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power po tential of the engine The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds as in the position D The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selec tor lever out of the position D into the position S Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic B1Z 0500 Fig 103 Selector lever and multifunction steering wheel 104 Using the system First read and obser
46. bulb for the main beam Fig 163 Removing the bulb for the main beam First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 gt Remove the head light page 192 gt Remove the rubber cover 3 Fig 160 on page 192 gt Remove connector A Fig 163 gt Press the circlip B in the direction of the head lamp and then unhook to the side gt Remove the light bulb C and insert a new light bulb in such a way that the fix ing lugs of the light bulb socket fit into the recesses at the reflector Installation is carried out in the reverse order Fog lights and daytime running lights B1Z 0485 Fig 164 Front bumper Protective grille removing the fog light 194 Do it yourself First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 Bulb arrangement Fig 164 Bulb for daytime running light Light bulb for fog lights Removing the cap gt Insert your fingers into opening A Fig 164 gt By pulling in the direction of arrow 1 first of all undo the cover in the upper area on the side facing the fog light gt Afterwards undo the cover in the direction of arrow 2 on the other side too remove Replacing light bulbs for fog lights daytime running lights gt Insert your hand into the opening left by the cap and press the lug D Fig 164 in the direction of the arrow gt Remove the front fog lamp gt Turn t
47. but must be replaced a Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed from old cars or have been recycled a A modification to the suspension of the vehicle including the use of non ap proved rim tyre combinations can alter the functioning of the airbag and in crease the risk of serious or fatal injuries in an accident Parts of the airbag system may be damaged when working on the airbag system or removing and installing system parts due to other repairs This may mean that the airbags will not deploy properly or not at all in the event of an accident Accessories changes and replacement of parts 177 Do it yourself Fig 146 Placing of the warning triangle First aid box and warning triangle The first aid box is attached by a strap to the right hand side of the luggage com partment The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber Straps Fig 146 A First aid box and warning triangle Estate car In estate vars the first aid box and warning triangle are housed in the right hand side compartment in the luggage compartment The compartment is opened by turning the locks in the direction of the arrow Fig 146 B EJ warnine The first aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants 178 Do it yourself i Note Pa
48. certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The fastened three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions side and rear end collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front 128 Safety EI WARNING a Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a KODA specialist garage The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident If the belt tensioners have been deployed it is then necessary to replace the entire system Note a Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an indi cation of a fire in the vehicle a When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system it is impor tant to comply with national legal requirements SKODA Service Partners are fa miliar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed infor mation Introductory information The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically The airbag warning light 2 comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on page 24 The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and
49. changed by a SKODA specialist garage We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs be always carried in the vehi cle Replacement bulbs can be purchased from SKODAOriginal Accessories a We recommend that the headlight settings are checked by a KODA specialist garage after replacing a bulb in the main or low beam a Gas discharge bulbs and LED diodes are replaced by a KODA specialist garage Headlights Fig 160 Headlights Bulb arrangement removal First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 Overview of the location of the bulbs Fig 160 1 front turn signal light 2 parking lights and low beam 3 main beam light The headlight must be removed in order to change the light bulb of the parking lights low beam lights and main beam lights as well as the turn signal lights Removing the main beam lights gt Open the bonnet page 160 Opening and closing the bonnet gt Unscrew the plastic nuts A Fig 160 gt Pull the locking button B upwards gt Pull the locking lever on the headlight as far as the stop in the direction of ar row C gt Disconnect the plug connection and carefully remove the head light in the di rection of arrow D Installation is carried out in the reverse order Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light Fig 161 Removing light bulb for turn sig nal light First read and observe the introductory informati
50. could lead to injuries in the event of an accident Insert ashtray insert gt Place the ashtray insert in the mount and press it in EI warninec Never place flammable objects in the ashtray risk of fire CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey There is a risk of spilling e g when braking which may cause damage to the elec trical components or seat upholstery a 68 Using the system Fig 65 Rear ashtray low centre console high centre console Opening the ashtray on the low centre console gt Grasp the ashtray cover at the lower edge A Fig 65 and fold it open in the direction of arrow Remove the ashtray from the low centre console gt Grasp the ashtray at the handle B Fig 65 and remove from above Removing the ashtray from the low centre console gt Place the ashtray insert into the console and press it in Opening the ashtray on the high centre console gt Press on the top part of the ashtray cover in area C Fig 65 Removing the ashtray from the high centre console gt Lightly push the ashtray cover downwards as far as the stop gt Grasp the ash tray insert at the cover D Fig 65and remove Inserting the ashtray into the high centre console gt Place the ashtray insert in the mount and press it in F warnine Never place flammable objects in the ashtray risk of fire Fig 66 Centre console Cigarette lighter Using the system
51. do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself as this can result in the incorrect setting of the Service Interval Display which can also cause possible problems with the operation of your vehicle i Note a Never reset the display between service intervals as this will result in the incor rect display a Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle bat tery is disconnected a f the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display This work is carried out by a SKODA specialist garage a After resetting the display with flexible service intervals the displayed data is the same as that for a vehicle with fixed service intervals We therefore recom mend that the Service Interval Display is only reset by a SKODA Service Partner who will reset the display with a vehicle system tester a For more information on the service intervals Service Plan Digital clock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The clock is set using the knob 5 Fig 2 on page 8 Turn the knob 5 to select the display you wish to change Make the change by pressing the knob On vehicles that are fitted with the information display it is also possible to set the clock in the menu Time page 16 Recommended gear Fig 4 Recommended gear 4 _ _ 20 NAG Firs
52. door when closing it a A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then sud denly held firm by the belt a The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects e g specta cles ball point pens keys etc as this may be a cause of injuries a No two persons also not children should ever use a single seat belt togeth er a The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to pro tect and the risk of injury increases The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly a Many layers of clothing and loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jacket do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts a It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts e g for shortening the belts for smaller persons Seat belts 125 I WARNING Continued The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position page 59 Rear seats The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belt webbing may im pair proper operation of the inertia reel page 154 Seat belts The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any
53. eR e ASTI athe fils teste el A ing a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel page 133 Deactivating airbags a Never use a child safety seat in which the child is seated with its back facing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 135 the direction of travel on the front passenger seat if the airbag is switched on The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side air This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front pas bag Fig 122 A There must be sufficient room between the child and the de senger airbag The airbag may cause the child severe or even fatal injuries in ployment area of the side airbag so that the airbag can provide as much protec the event of it being deployed tion as possible Fig 122 B a This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the B column on the front passenger side Fig 121 The sticker is visible upon opening the al WARNING front passenger door For some countries the sticker is also affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger a Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of a If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of travel is used the side airbag risk of injury on the front passenger seat the front passenger seat must be move
54. engine reaches its operating temperature these substances might ignite risk of fire Protection of hollow spaces First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re treated If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures these must be re moved with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner F WARNING Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re move Wax risk of fire Artificial leather and materials First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 148 The artificial leather can be cleaned using a damp cloth If this does not prove to be adequate these parts can only be treated with special solvent free plastic cleaning and care products Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors boot cover etc using specific cleaning agents e g dry foam Use a soft sponge brush or commercially available microfibre cloth Use a cloth and a specific cleaning agent to clean the roof trim Some clothing materials such as dark denim do in part not have sufficient col our fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat cov ers fabric or l
55. environmental pollution and wear of your vehi cle The maximum speed of your vehicle should as far possible never be used Fuel consumption pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds The Fig 126 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle Fuel consumption will be halved if only three quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle is used Reducing idling Idling also costs fuel In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system turn off the engine when in a traffic jam at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times Even af ter just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you Start the engine up again If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions though are particularly high in the warming up phase Therefore start driving as soon as the engine has started whereby high engine speeds should be avoided Regular servicing A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a SKODA specialist garage you create the conditions needed for driving economically The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal Also check the oil
56. established a new connection with the hands free system an update of the relevant phone book is performed The updating can take a few minutes During this time the phone book which was stored after the last update was completed is available Newly stored telephone numbers are on ly shown after the updating has ended The update is interrupted if a telephone event e g incoming or outgoing call voice control dialogue occurs during the updating procedure After the telephone event has ended the updating starts anew GSM Il The internal phonebook provides 2 500 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1 200 tel ephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500 the phone book is not complete GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile GSM Ill The internal phonebook provides 2 000 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 5 numbers On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system a maximum of 1 000 tel ephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance If the mobile phone s telephone book has more than 2 000 contacts the follow ing message will appear in the information display Phone book not fully loaded Introductory information The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II hands free system includes a convenience mode for th
57. factor Example In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h an unsecured object with a weight of 4 5 kg produces an energy which corresponds to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg You can imagine the injuries that can occur if this object flies through the interior com partment and hits an occupant EI warnine a Store the objects in the boot and attach them to the lashing eyes Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other oncoming traffic This risk is still increased if the objects which are fly ing around are hit by a deployed airbag In this case the objects which are thrown back can injure the occupants hazard a Please note that the handling properties of the vehicle may be affected when transporting heavy objects as the centre of gravity can be displaced risk of accident The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly a If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with un suitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents To prevent items of luggage from being thrown for ward always use suitable lashing straps which must be firmly attached to the lashing eyes BE WARNING Continued a The items carried in the boot must be stored in such a way that no o
58. for the fuse box using a screwdriver Fig 158 gt Replace the cover once the fuse has been changed Fuse assignment in the dash panel Power consumer Diagnostic socket engine control unit fuel pump Control unit for ABS ESC Airbag Heating Air conditioning system Reversing lights Control unit for headlamp beam adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 5 Instrument cluster control unit for automatic gearbox control unit for electromechanical power steering parking aid 7 11 Not assigned 12 Central locking control unit 13 Diagnostic socket Light switch 14 Control unit for automatic gearbox Selector lever lock 15 Vehicle voltage control unit interior lights 16 Climatronic 190 Do it yourself Power consumer Not assigned Rear window wiper Control unit for trailer detection Not assigned Cornering lights for the left and right side Air blower for Climatronic Front power window Cigarette lighter Rear window heater auxiliary heating and ventilation Power socket in the boot Fuel pump Injection valves diesel engine Radio Engine control unit Crankcase ventilation heater Control unit for automatic gearbox Haldex Vacuum pump Rear power window Electric sliding tilting roof Control unit for convenience functions Alarm Headlight cleaning system Heated front seats Heated rear seats
59. from the housing of the tail light replace and re insert gt Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder 196 Do it yourself Fig 169 Boot Cover of the lamp holder removing the lamp holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 Replacing the light bulbs in the lamp holder gt Open the lamp holder cover Fig 169 A gt Remove the bulbs for the parking lights arrow 1 and 2 gt Press the catch in the direction of the arrow and remove the lamp hold er Fig 169 B gt Push in the bulb into the socket turn counter clockwise up to the stop and re move gt Insert a new bulb into the socket and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop gt Replace the lamp holder so that the catch engages in the housing of the tail light gt Reinsert the bulbs for the parking lights arrow 1 and 2 gt Close the lamp holder cover Change the light bulb for the parking light gt Open the lamp holder cover Fig 169 A gt Remove the faulty light bulb arrow 1 or 2 from the housing of the tail light replace and re insert gt Close the lamp holder cover Technical data Introductory information The details given in the vehicle s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual Please refer to the official vehicle registration documents or cons
60. fuel canisters in your vehi cle for safety reasons In the event of an accident the canister might be dam aged and fuel may leak out risk of fire CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and exhaust system Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle s paintwork risk of paint damage Fig 129 Right rear side of the vehicle Open fuel filler flap fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 155 The filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked with the central locking Open fuel filler flap gt Press in the middle of the left area of the fuel filler flap Fig 129 A gt Unscrew the filler cap by turning it to the left and place the cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap Fig 129 B Closing the filler cap gt Turn the filler cap to the right until it clicks into place gt Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place Check that the fuel filler flap is closed properly CAUTION Before refuelling it is necessary to switch off the auxiliary heating system aux iliary heating and ventilation The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly Do not continue filling the
61. fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up Inspecting and replenishing 155 Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres or 60 litres containing a reserve of approx 7 litres Unleaded petrol First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 155 Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded fuel that complies with the standard EN 228 in Germany standard DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON and 98 RON Prescribed fuel unleaded fuel 95 91 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON Unleaded petrol 91 RON can al so be used but results in a slight loss in performance If in an emergency the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed the journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a low engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed oc tane number as soon as possible Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol min 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating 91 RON if petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available The journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a minimum engine load Driving at high engine r
62. gt Open the rear right door gt Push the net partition housing A Fig 61 in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the mounts on the rear seats in the direction of the arrow 2 Install gt Insert the recesses on the net partition housing into the mounts on the rear seat backrests gt Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 Fig 61 as far as the stop gt Fold the rear seats back into their original position This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points 67 Roofload S EJ WARNING The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably at tached risk of accident a Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps a Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system a The handling properties of your vehicle change when you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the displacement of the cen tre of gravity and the increased wind attack area risk of accident The style of driving and speed must therefore be adapted to the current circumstances a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility weather road and traffic conditions The permissible roof load permissible axle loads and gross permissible weight of your vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances risk of
63. hazard warning light system page 44 Note If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnected the yellow warning light comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light should go out after driving a short distance If the yellow warning light does not go out after starting the engine again and a short drive it is necessary to visit a SKODA spe cialist garage Traction control system TCS amp The warning light flashes amp to show that the ASR is currently operating Instruments and warning lights 21 If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine the ASR can be switched off for technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the warning light does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ASR is fully functional again If the warning light 5 lights up there is a fault in the ASR The following is displayed in the information display Error traction control ASR Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 96 Traction control system TCS Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light amp comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light should go out after driving a short distance Electronic Stability Control ESC amp The warning light flashes amp to show that the ESC is currently operating If the warning light comes on immediately after you start th
64. ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has come to a complete stop by applying the handbrake Otherwise the steering wheel could block risk of accident a When leaving the vehicle the ignition must always be removed This is par ticularly important if children are left in the vehicle Otherwise the children could for example start the engine risk of accident or injury a Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The ex haust gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas hazard Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious ness and death a Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary risk of acci dent CAUTION a The starter may only be operated ignition key position 3 Fig 94 on page 93 if the engine is not running The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activated when the engine is running Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts otherwise the starter could be damaged a Avoid high engine revolutions full throttle and high engine loads as long as the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature risk of damaging the en gine Do not tow start the engine danger of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may d
65. intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h gt Press again the button B or D to confirm the speed limit or wait approx 5 seconds and the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing Change or delete speed limit gt With the button A Fig 6 on page 13 or if applicable the adjustment wheel D select the menu item Warning against excessive speeds gt Pressing the button B or D deletes the speed limit gt Pressing the button B or D again activates change mode for the speed limit If the set speed limit is exceeded an audible signal will sound as a warning At the same time the message Warning against excessive speeds appears on the display with the set limit value The set speed limit value remains stored even after switching off the ignition CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Main menu 15 Settings SG Door boot lid and bonnet warning 17 Auto Check Control 17 The information display provides you with information on the current operating state of your vehicle The information system also provides you with data de pending on the equipment installed in the vehicle relating to the radio mobile phone multi functional indicator navigation system the unit connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox page 102 E warnine Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As t
66. level when refuelling Oil consumption is dependent to a con siderable extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil consumption could be as high as 0 5 litres 1 000 km depending on your style of driving It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first and rea ches its lowest level only after a certain running in time The oil consumption of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5 000 km SA For the sake of the environment a Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthetic high lubricity oils a Regularly check the ground under the vehicle Have your vehicle inspected by a SKODA specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor Note We recommend that your vehicle is serviced on a regular basis by a SKODA Serv ice Partner Driving andthe Environment 141 Avoid short distances 1 100km Fig 127 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in 1 100 km at different tem peratures 5 15 25 30 Short distances result in an above average high fuel consumption We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start Fuel consump tion drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The consumption stabilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating tempera ture An important factor i
67. light duration of the COMING HOME function Leaving Home Switch on off and adjust the light duration of the LEAVING HOME function Dayl dri light Switch on off the DAY LIGHT function Switch on off the function for automatic rear window wiping Rear wiper Lane ch flash Switch on off the convenience flashing function Travel mode Switch on off the travel model function Factory setting Restore the factory setting for the lighting Time The time time format 12 or 24 hour indicator and the changeover between sum mer winter time can be set here Winter tyres Here you can set the speed at which an audible signal should sound This func tion is for example used for winter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum speed of the vehicle When exceeding the speed the following is shown on the information display Winter tyres max speed km h Units of measurement The units for the temperature consumption and distance driven can be set here Assistants The tones of the audible signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here Second speed The display of the second speed in mph or in km h can be switched on here Service Here you can have the remaining kilometres and days until the next service inter val displayed and reset the Service Interval Display Factory setting After selecting the menu Factory setting the factory setting of the information
68. manual gear box at the very latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached During acceleration depressing the accelerator exceptionally high engine speeds are automatically reduced yet the engine is not protected against too high engine speeds which are caused by incorrectly shifting down the gears re sulting in a sudden increase of the engine speeds above the permitted maximum revolutions which can lead to engine damage For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies Do not drive at an engine speed that is too low Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly Observe the recommended gear page 11 Recom mended gear CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is Stationary or when driving in individual gears SA For the sake of the environment Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels and protects the environment New tyres New tyres have to be run in since they do not offer optimal grip at first Drive especially carefully for the first 500 km or so New brake pads New brake pads initially do not provide full braking efficiency The brake pads must initially be run in Drive especially carefully for
69. mode the engine must be started manually with the key The following messages in the instrument cluster display must be observed Messages in the instrument cluster display valid for vehicles without Information display ERROR START STOP Error in the START STOP system START STOP NOT POSSIBLE Automatic engine shut down is not possible START STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shut down stop phase SWITCH OFF IGNITION Switch off the ignition oh enn Start the engine manually F WARNING The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run ning a Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off CAUTION Deactivate the START STOP system before driving through water on the street page 144 Note a Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal temper ature of the vehicle battery even after several hours If the vehicle remains out doors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight it can take sev eral hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the START STOP system a f the Climatronic is running in automatic mode under certain conditions the engine may not switch off automatically Starting off and Driving 101 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Introductory information 102 St
70. observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 Warning against excessive speeds An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km h The audible warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls below this speed limit Note This function is only valid for some countries 1 Valid for Octavia Combi 4x4 and Octavia Scout Coolant temperature gauge First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The coolant temperature gauge 3 Fig 2 on page 8 operates only when the ig nition is switched on The following guidelines regarding the temperature ranges must be observed to avoid any damage to the engine Cold range If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the mid range of the scale for a normal style of driving The pointer may also move further to the right at high engine loads and high outside temperatures CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air in let impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant There is then a risk of the engine overheating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads page 20 Fuel gauge First read and
71. of the bag with the zip is in the boot gt Push the skis into the removable through loading bag from the boot H gt Close the through loading bag 76 Using the system Securing gt Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bind ings Fig 82 gt Fold the seat backrest a little forward gt Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around the upper part of the seat backrest gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking button clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest gt Insert the securing strap B into the lock Cj until it clicks into place On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition guide the securing strap around the housing when the net partition is rolled up After fixing the net parti tion in place it is not longer possible to unroll the net partition F WARNING a After placing skis into the through loading bag you must secure the bag with the securing strap B Fig 82 The strap A must hold the skis tight a Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding also refer to imprint on the removable through loading bag The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 17 kg a Place the skis and sticks in the removable through loading bag with the tips facing to the rear a f there are several pairs of skis in the removable through load
72. of the multifunction display one after the other Selecting functions using the multifunction steering wheel gt Press the button C Fig 6 gt Turn the adjustment wheel D upwards or downwards This opens the individu al functions of the multifunction display one after the other 1 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre Reseting gt Select the desired memory gt Press and hold the button B Fig 6 or D for a short while The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero with the but ton B Fig 6 or D gt Average fuel consumption gt Distance driven gt Average speed gt Driving time Multifunction display details First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 12 Outside temperature The current outside temperature is shown in the display If the outside temperature drops below 4 C a snow flake symbol warning sig nal for ice on the road appears before the temperature indicator and an audible signal will sound After pressing the rocker switch A Fig 6 on page 13 or c the function shown last is indicated Driving time The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased appears in the display If you wish to measure the driving time from a particular time you need to set the memory to zero at this point in time by pressing the button Fig 6 on page 13 or D for more
73. off Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag a f the airbag warning light AIRBAG OFF airbag switched off flashes the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident Have the airbag system checked by a SKODA specialist garage immediately 134 Safety CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 135 Child safety and side airbag 136 Classification of child seats 136 Suitability of child seats 137 Child seats with the ISOFIX system 137 Child seat with the TOP TETHER system 137 Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat In contrast to adults the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory provi sions Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard must be used The ECE R Norm stands for Economic Commission for Europe Regulation Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard have a test seal that cannot be removed a large E within a circle with the test number below FJ wAaRNING The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap Never leave children unattended in the vehi
74. on gt Turn the blower switch B into position O to switch the blower off gt If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply use the button 1 page 82 jin The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting up section Recirculated air mode Note Regulating the air distribution If the air distribution is positioned towards the windows the total amount of air is gt The direction of the inlet air flow is controlled with air distribution regulator used to defrost the windows and thus no air will be fed to the footwell This can Fig 88 page 80 lead to restriction of the heating comfort Rear window heater gt Press the button 2 Fig 88 Further information page 47 Set heating Recommended basic settings of the heating controls for the respective operating modes Setting of the control dial A Button 1 Air outlet vents 3 Defrosting the windshield and side To the right up to the Open and align with the side win Do not switch on windows stop dow Free windshield and side windows Hedited temperature oy EE TE A EE Open and align with the side win from mist dow To the right up to the The fastest heating stop Briefly switch on Opening Comfortable heating Desired temperature 2or3 Do not switch on Opening To the left up to the Fresh air mode ventilation stop Desired position ZS Do not switch on Opening Heating and air conditioning system 81
75. on first the rSAP function gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the menu Phone New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search gt Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found gt Within 30 seconds enter the 16 digit code that is shown on the information dis play and confirm it according to the instructions on the display of your mobile phone 1 Does not apply for Radio Swing gt If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code enter the PIN code for the SIM card in your phone The telephone connects to the hands free system during the first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the information display when the vehicle is stationary as this is the only situation when you can choose whether the PIN code should be stored gt Follow the instructions in the information display the first time a new user is stored gt Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the tele phone book and the identification data from the SIM card into the control unit Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HPP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the menu Phone New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search gt Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found gt Within 30 seconds enter
76. page 20 Coolant temperature cool ant level The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating F WARNING The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic sit uation Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer and cause functional faults to the vehicle s entire electrical system as well as acci dents and severe injuries a Any work on the electrical system must be carried out only by KODA spe cialist garages a Never directly connect the trailer s electrical system with the electrical con nections for the tail lights or other current sources CAUTION a The trailer stabilisation need not be able to correctly detect all of driving situa tions a Trailers that sway slightly are not always detected by the trailer stabilisation and thus are not stabilised accordingly a Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regulated a Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres a When the ball rod is removed the mounting shaft must be sealed with an ap propriate cover This prevents foreign matter from penetrating into the mounting shaft See the fitting instructions for the towing device Note a We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service in tervals if you tow a trailer frequen
77. panel dows gt Press on the level in the direction of arrow Fig 17 the boot lid is unlocked a In the event that the windows are frozen first of all eliminate the gt Open the boot lid ice page 151 De icing windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the power windows otherwise the power window mechanism could be damaged a When leaving the locked vehicle make sure that the windows are closed at all times Unlocking Combi gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 59 gt Pull up the panel C Fig 17 gt Use a screwdriver or similar to press the lever D as far as the stop in the direc tion of the arrow the boot lid is unlocked gt Open the boot lid E 34 Using the system ai Note a After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open or close the windows for approx 10 minutes The power windows are only switched off completely once the driver or front passenger door are opened a When driving always use the existing heating air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds a At high speeds you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily high fuel consumption a The convenience opening of the windows by means of the key in the driver s lock is only possible within 45 seconds of deactivating or activ
78. parts using warm or hot water risk of for mation of cracks in the glass a When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage a Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel sand and salt must not be removed from the window glass and mirrors risk of damage to the surface of the windows and mirrors Radio reception and aerial First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 Car parks tunnels tall buildings or mountains can disrupt the radio signal even causing it to fail completely With factory fitted radios and navigation systems the aerial for the radio recep tion can be installed at different locations in the vehicle gt on the inside of the rear window along with the rear window heater gt on the inside of the rear side windows gt on the inside of the windscreen gt on the roof Headlight lenses First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 148 Use soap and clean water to clean the plastic headlight lenses CAUTION a Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses this may damage the protective paintwork and consequently cause the formation of cracks on the headlight lenses a Do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products to clean the headlights risk of damaging the headl
79. pre set mode Dectivate Disable pre set mode Factory setting Restore factory setting Back Return to main menu Only one programmed pre set time can be active The last programmed pre set time remains active After the auxiliary heating activates at the set time it is necessary to pre set a time again If the pre set menu is closed by selecting the menu item Back or if no changes are made on the display for more than 10 seconds the set values are stored but the pre set time is not activated An warning light on the button 8 Fig 91 on page 88 is illuminated when the system is running The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or can be deactivated earlier by pressing the button to directly switch on off the auxiliary heating Fig 91 on page 88 or by using the radio remote control Radio remote control Fig 92 Auxiliary heating Radio remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 87 gt For switching on press the button Fig 92 gt For switching off press the button OFF The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle If the battery is properly charged the effective range is up to 600 m To switch on off the auxiliary heating hold the radio remote control vertically with the an tenna A Fig 92 facing u
80. protecting the paintwork from harmful environmental influences The vehicle must be treated with a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body work after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Polishing Polishing is necessary if the vehicle s paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives If the polish does not contain any preserving elements the paint must be treated with a preservative afterwards CAUTION a Never apply wax to the windows a Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes a Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment otherwise the paintwork can be scratched 150 General Maintenance Chrome parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If this method does not completely clean chrome parts use a specific chrome care product CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment otherwise they can be scratched Paint damage First read and observe the introductory information
81. rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory fitted towing device or a towing device from SKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer and the rear fog light switched on The rear fog light is located in the rear light array on the driver s side 1 If both switch on versions are conflicting for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority Instrument lighting HONS Dash panel Instrument lighting First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 gt Switch on the light gt Turn the control dial Fig 25 to the desired intensity of the instrument light ing The illumination intensity of the Information display page 15 is set automatical ly It is only possible to adjust the instrument lighting with the control dial if the light intensity drops below the set value of the light sensor Lights and visibility 43 Headlight beam adjustment 20 Fig 26 Dash panel Lights and visibility First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 Turn the control dial Fig 26 to the desired width of illumination Settings The positions correspond approximately to the following car load Front seats occupied boot empty 1 All seats occupied boot empty 2 All seats occupied boot loaded 3
82. rear seats Seats and Stowage 65 gt First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C gt Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged gt Fold the storage compartment cover D downwards If you wish to use the entire boot the foldable boot cover can be re moved Fig 56 on page 64 Fig 60 Pull out the net partition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 Pulling out gt Fold the rear seats forward page 59 gt Pull the net partition by the bracket A Fig 60 out of the housing B gt First of all insert the cross rod into the mount C on one side and push it for ward gt In the same way insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle Folding gt First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C Fig 60 gt Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged gt Fold the rear seats back into their original position 66 Using the system Fig 61 Rear seats Net partition hous ing First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 Removing gt Fold the rear seats forward page 59
83. reinforced edge of the Install wheel trim gt Push the caps onto the wheel bolts up to the stop gt Push the wheel wrench through the clamp support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim The wheel bolt caps are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the stor age space for the spare wheel ai Install gt First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the valve opening provided Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks correctly in place CAUTION Use the pressure of your hand do not knock the full wheel trim Heavy knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into the wheel can result in damage to the guide and centring elements of the full wheel trim a First of all check that the theft deterrent wheel bolt is located in the hole near the valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a theft deterrent wheel bolt page 182 Securing wheels against theft f wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air is assured to cool the brake system a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 Pull off the wheel trim cap on light alloy wheels Pulling off gt Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit Fig 144 E Fig 143 Remove the cap 174 General Maintenance Tyre co
84. report Fast rewind Press briefly changing the audio source Press briefly Call up the main menu Press briefly Interruption of the traffic report without function Turn upwards Display of the stored accessible stations Scroll upwards Interruption of the traffic report Changing to the previous title without Turn downwards Display of the stored accessible stations Scroll downwards function a Only valid for the navigation system Columbus Note a The loudspeakers in the vehicle are adjusted to the power output of the radio and navigation system of 4x20 W a The sound system equipment comprises loudspeakers that are adjusted to the amplifier power output of 4x50 W 6x25 W AUX IN and MDI inputs The AUX IN input is located below the front armrest and is marked with AUX The input MDI is located in the storage compartment on the front passenger side The AUX IN and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources e g iPod or mp3 player and to play back music from these devices via the factory fitted ra dio or navigation system For a description of use refer to the operating instructions for the relevant radio or navigation system Interruption of the traffic report Changing to the next title CD change Fig 109 The CD changer The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the left side compartment of the boot Inserting the
85. risk of fire a If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sus tained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not drive the vehicle Get professional assistance CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest danger of overheating Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching it on again Check after driving for 10 minutes First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 182 Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes If the tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or less gt Do not drive the vehicle You cannot properly seal with tyre with the break down kit gt Get professional assistance If the tyre inflation pressure is 1 3 bar or more gt Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value see inside of fuel filler cap gt Continue driving carefully to the nearest SKODA specialist garage at a maxi mum speed of 80 km h 50 mph CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Jump starting 186 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 186 The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump start your vehicle if the en gine will not start because the battery is flat Jump start cables are required for this purpose Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of t
86. should be washed depends on a wide range of factors such as gt Frequency of use gt The parking situation garage below trees etc gt Season of the year gt Weather conditions gt Environmental influences The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive effect can be High temperatures such as those caused by intensive sun s rays accentuate this caustic effect It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter Automatic car wash systems First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car wash systems The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system closing the windows including the sliding tilting roof etc If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts such as a spoiler roof luggage rack two way radio aerial it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing through the automatic vehicle wash system Washing by hand First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 148 When washing by ha
87. special equipment model variants or market dependent equipment Consequently this vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment compo nents described in this Owner s manual The level of equipment of your vehicle refers to your purchase contract of the ve hicle For more information contact your local SKODA retailer The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only inten ded for general information The Service Plan gt includes vehicle data including information on service work performed gt is a record of services provided gt is provided for entries relating to the mobility warranty valid only for some countries gt serves as warranty certificate of the SKODA dealer The service records are one of the conditions for warranty claims Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to a SKODA specialist garage If the Service Schedule is missing or worn please contact the KODA specialist garage that regularly services your car You will receive a duplicate in which the previously carried out service work is confirmed by the SKODA specialist garage The Help on the Road brochure The brochure contains the important emergency telephone numbers as well as telephone numbers and contact addresses of SKODA Service Partners in different countries Abbreviations Using the system Cockpit Overview Instruments and warning lights Instrument cluster
88. specialist garage The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging CAUTION On vehicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth page 186 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 168 General Maintenance Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 165 On disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery the following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault free Operation Operating measure Electrical power window operational faults page 37 Enter the radio navigation system code num User manual of the radio or ber user manual of the navigation system Setting the clock page TI Data in the multifunction display are deleted page 12 Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by a SKODA Service Partner to ensure the full functionality of all electrical systems Replacing the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 165 When replacing a battery the new vehicle battery must have the same capacity voltage amperage and be the same size Suitable types of vehicle batteries can be purchased from a SKODA Service Partner We
89. stains e g ball point pens marker pen nail varnish dispersion paint shoe polish etc with a special stain remover suitable for leather Leather care Treat the leather roughly every six months with a suitable leather care product Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product Dry off the leather with a soft dry cloth CAUTION a Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from bleaching If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it a Sharp edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel Note a Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular basis and each time after cleaning The cream nourishes the leather allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protection a Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months remove any fresh stains as they occur Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 153 a Also look after the leather dye Refresh any areas with a special coloured leath er cream as required a The leather is a natural material with specific properties During the use of the vehicle minor optical changes c
90. stand up on the seats gt kneel on the seats gt tilt the seat backrest fully to the back gt lean against the dash panel gt lie on the rear seat bench gt only sit on the front area of the seat gt sit to the side gt lean out of the window gt put the feet out of the window gt put the feet on the dash panel gt put the feet on the seat upholstery gt transport somebody in the footwell gt have the seat belt not fastened when driving gt be in the boot 124 Safety CQ Introduction Fig 111 Driver wearing seat belt This chapter contains information on the following subjects The physical principle of a frontal collision SS Y T26 Fastening and unfastening seat belts 127 Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats 128 Belttensioners _ RB Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an ac cident They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated posi tion Fig 111 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy energy of motion to a considerable ex tent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well result in severe injuries The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optim
91. the 16 digit code that is shown on the information dis play and confirm it according to the instructions on the display of your mobile phone gt Follow the instructions on the information display and the mobile phone to store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data from the SIM card into the control unit The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile If the PIN code was stored the telephone is automatically detected and connec ted with the hands free system the next time the ignition is switched on Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been establish ed Disconnecting the connection gt By removing the key from the ignition lock the connection is disconnected dur ing a telephone call gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the information display in the menu Bluetooth User Select user Disconnect On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory it is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ignition lock by pressing the button on the touchscreen of the radio or navigation sys tem refer to the operating instructions for the radio or navigation system Communication 113 Note Inthe memory of the control unit up to three users can be stored whereby the hands free system can only communicate actively with one user If a conn
92. the button 2 Fig 89 Further information page 47 Auxiliary heating parking heating gt Press the button 3 Fig 89 to directly switch on off the auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation Further information page 87 Note a The whole heat output will be needed to defrost the windscreen and side win dows No warm air will be fed to the footwell This can lead to restriction of the heating comfort a The warning light AC lights after activation even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system have been met page 82 Introductory infor mation By lighting up of the warning light in the button the operational readi ness of the cooling system is signalled Heating and air conditioning system 83 Setting the air conditioning system Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning sys tem for the respective operating modes Setting of the control dial Button a CB a C2 a A o a A oo Defrost defog windscreen and Desired tempera Automatically Air outlet vents 3 Do not switch on Open and align with the side side windows ture switched on window The fastest heating To the right up to the stop Switched off Briefly switch on Opening Comfortable heating Desired tempera ture 2or3 Switched off Do not switch on Opening The fastest cooling To the left up to briefly 4 then Activated
93. the interior lighting comes on if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position gt the hazard warning light is switched on gt all the doors are unlocked gt the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted i Note A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle 130 Safety Front airbags Fig 116 Driver airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the dashboard Fig 117 Safe distance to steering wheel inflated airbags In the event of a severe frontal collision the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel Fig 116 A The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the stowage compartment B Fig 116 If the airbags are deployed the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and infla ted in front of the driver and front passenger Fig 117 D The forward move ment of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make con tact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced The airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in a controlled manner depending on the load of the particular car occupant in o
94. the key in the driver s lock in the unlock position gt Press and hold he central locking button in the area of the symbol 4 Closing gt Press and hold the lock button 8 on the remote control key gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the lock position gt Press and hold he central locking button in the area of the symbol 4 You can interrupt the opening or closing process for the windows immediately by releasing the key or the lock button Operational faults First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 34 Electrically operated power windows do not operate If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected while the window was opened the electrically operated power windows do not operate The system must be activated Proceed as follows in order to re establish the function gt switch on the ignition gt pull the top edge of the button in the driver s door to close the window gt release the button gt pull the relevant button upwards again for approx 3 seconds Operation in winter In the winter ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause there to be more resistance when closing the window The window will stop and move back several centimetres It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the window page 36 Introductory information Fig 20 Control dial for the power slid ing tilting roof The sliding tilting roof is
95. the power setting function fails at any time the exterior mirrors can be set by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface Contact your KODA specialist garage if there is a fault with the power setting of the exterior mirrors Automatic dimming exterior mirror on the driver s side The exterior mirror on the driver s side is dimmed together with the interior mir ror If the automatic dimming is switched on the mirror dims automatically de pending on the light striking the mirror from the rear After the reverse gear is engaged the mirror always moves back into the normal not dimmed position Note a Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear view mirror is not affected by other objects a Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor so that they do not impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation a f the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off the exterior mirror dim ming is also switched off Lights and visibility 53 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manually adjusting the front seats 55 Adjusting front seats electrically 55 Storing setting 56 Assigning the remote control key to the memory button 56 Retrieving the seat and exterior mirror settings 56 The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a
96. the same time slide it downwards and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds 40 Using the system Activating the daytime running lights gt Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds of switching on the ignition and at the same time slide it upwards and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds On vehicles with an information display the daytime running lights can also be activated or deactivated via the menu Settings Lights amp Vision On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in the front bumper the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when activating the function daylight driving lights neither front nor rear If the vehicle is not equipped with separate lights for daylight driving lights the combination of the low beam the parking lights front and rear including the li cence plate light is used as daylight driving lights When the daylight driving lights are switched on the illumination of the instru ment cluster is switched off however it is switched on in the position AUTO when it is dark and the low beam shines with full brightness 100 of the perform ance Automatic driving lamp control Fig 23 Dash panel Light switch First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 Switching on gt Turn the light switch Fig 23 to position AVTO Switc
97. vehicle rolls backward risk of accident f you have to stop on a slope depress and hold the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling back a Ona smooth or slippery road surface using the kickdown function can cause the driven wheels to spin risk of skidding CAUTION a The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload protection If the uphill function is used when the vehicle is stationary or driving Slowly uphill the thermal stress on the clutches is increased a f the clutch system overheats the symbol lt is shown in the information dis play along with the message Gearbox overheated Stop Owner s man appears An audible signal sounds as a warning signal Stop the vehicle switch off the en gine and wait until the symbol lt i disappears risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the symbol disappears Introductory information First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 102 Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically The gearbox can also be switched to Tiptronic mode This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually page 104 The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N If the selector lever is not in the P or N positions when locking the steering switch ing the ignition on or off or when leaving the engine on the following message will appear i
98. vehicle s braking distance risk of accident The rear fog light 0 The warning light 0 comes on when the rear fog lights are operating page 43 Bulb failure The warning light comes on if a bulb is faulty gt within 2 seconds of the ignition being switched on gt when switching on the defective light bulb The following is displayed in the information display Check front right dipped beam Exhaust inspection system If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the exhaust inspection system The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Glow plug system vo diesel engine The warning light 0 comes on after the ignition has been switched on The en gine can be started immediately after the pre glow warning light goes out There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light oo does not come on at all or lights up continuously If the warning light o gt begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EPC EPC fault light petrol engine If the warning light EPC lights up there is a fault in the engine control The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Diesel particulate filter diesel engine The diesel particulat
99. way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for gt safely and quickly reaching the controls gt a relaxed fatigue free body position gt achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system EI WARNING a Only adjust the driver s seat when the vehicle is stationary risk of accident Caution when adjusting the seat You may suffer injuries or bruises as a re sult of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention As the electric front seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is switch ed off even when the ignition key is withdrawn never leave children unat tended in the car The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle 54 Using the system I WARNING Continued a Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Children must be fastened page 135 Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system a The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occ
100. windscreen wipers manually de pending on the visibility conditions CAUTION a In cold temperatures and during the winter check before the journey or before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor a If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the ignition is turned back on The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold temperatures be tween the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned back on again a Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window a Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving a If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen a Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons These can be purchased from a SKODA Service Partner a The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen wiper arms are fol ded out The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and while do ing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet i Note a If the slower 2 Fig 35 on page 49 or the faster 3 wiper setting is switched on and the vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km h the lower wiper step is switched on
101. 0 1 4 Itr 90 kW TSI VW 504 00 1 6 1 75 kW VW 503 00 VW 504 00 1 6 Itr 75 kW MultiFuel VW 503 00 VW 504 00 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 1 8 Itr T12 kW TSI ese 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI VW 504 00 Diesel engines 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR Filling level Specification VW 507 00 1 9 1 77 kW TDI PD VW 506 01 VW 507 00 1 9 Itr 77 kW TD PD DPF VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 81 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 200 Technical data Specifications and capacity in l for vehicles with fixed service intervals Filling level Petrol engines 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI Specification VW 502 00 1 4 1 59 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 4 Itr 90 kW TSI VW 502 00 1 6 1 75 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 6 Itr 75 kW MultiFuel VW 502 00 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI Wiens oe 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI VW 502 00 If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can be used once for refilling Diesel engines 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR Specification VW 507 00 Filling level 1 9 1 77 kW TDI PD VW 505 01 1 9 Itr 77 kW TD PD DPF VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 81 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR VW 507 00 If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can be used once for refilling CAU
102. 10 Fig 90 on page 85 when the respective number of warning lights come on FJ warninec a Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary a Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up Defrosting windscreen Switching on gt Press the button 1 Fig 90 on page 85 Switching off gt Once again press the button 1 Fig 90 on page 85 or the button AUTO The temperature control is controlled automatically More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 Fig 86 on page 80 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Direct switching on off 88 System settings _ S Y Radio remote control 89 Changing the battery of the radio remote control 90 Auxiliary heating parking heating The auxiliary heater parking heater functions in connection with the air condi tioning system or Climatronic It can be used when stationary when the engine is switched off to preheat the vehicle and while driving e g during the heating phase of the engine The engine is also preheated if the auxiliary heating is switched on when the ve hicle is stationary and the engine is switched off Heating and air conditioning system 87 The auxiliary heating parking heating warms up t
103. 2 Ignition lock 93 Starting engine 93 Switching the engine off 93 EJ WwARNING a Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary s Maintain a distance of 25 cm 1 to the steering wheel Fig 93 on page 92 B Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidently change during the journey risk of accident a If the steering wheel is adjusted further towards the head the protection provided by the driver airbag in the event of an accident is reduced Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed a When driving the ignition key must always be in the position 2 Fig 94 on page 93 ignition switched on without the engine running This position is indicated by the warning lights coming on If this is not the case it could result in unexpected locking of the steering wheel risk of accident HE WARNING Continued Only pull the
104. 24 Transporting children safely 137 FI warnine a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system a Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the locking eyes Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye a On no account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other an chorage points 138 Safety Driving Tips New engine The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres Up to 1000 kilometres gt Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use i e 3 4 of the maximum permissible engine speed gt No full throttle gt Avoid high engine speeds gt Do not tow a trailer From 1000 up to 1500 kilometres gt Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the gear engaged i e up to the maximum permissible engine speed During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving style which you adopt during the first approx 1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in period is complete The maximum permissible engine speed is marked by the start of the red scale area of the revolutions counter On vehicles fitted with a
105. 72 Unidirectional tyres 173 Spare wheel 173 Full wheel trim 174 Wheel bolts 174 Wheel trim caps 174 Tyre control display 175 Wheel bolts 176 Winter tyres 176 Snow chains 176 EI warnine During the first 500 km new tyres do not offer optimum grip and appropri ate care should therefore be taken when driving risk of accident a Never drive with damaged tyres risk of accident Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by KODA for your model of vehicle Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle risk of accident The maximum permissible speed for your tyres must not be exceeded under any circumstances risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control of the vehicle a If the inflation pressure is too low the tyre must perform a higher rolling re sistance At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this This can result in tread separation and a tyre blowout 170 General Maintenance I WARNING Continued Do not where possible replace individual tyres but at least replace them on both wheels of a given axle at the same time Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels a Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age a You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesio
106. 9 The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in the lower sill The engraving is only visible after opening the door Do it yourself 181 gt Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill gt Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web Fig 150 B below the embossing in the side surface of the lower sill gt Ensure that the entire surface of the lifting jack base plate rests on level ground and is located in a vertical position to the area Fig 150 where the claw grasps the web gt Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground Securing wheels against theft Fig 151 Principle sketch Anti theft wheel bolt with adapter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 179 The anti theft wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them one anti theft wheel bolt per wheel can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided gt Pull off the full wheel trim from the wheel rim or the cap from the anti theft wheel bolt gt Insert the adapter B Fig 151 with its toothed side fully into the inner tooth ing of the safety wheel bolt A until the stop so that only the outer hexagon is jutting out gt Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop gt Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt pag
107. AUTION a Never repair fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher am perage risk of fire This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system a Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a KODA specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time a When unlocking and locking the cover for the fuse box in the engine compart ment it must be pressed on the sides of the box otherwise the locking mecha nism can be damaged The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied correctly Water can penetrate and cause damage to the vehicle if the cover was not applied correctly E Note a We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle A box of re placement fuses can be purchased from KODA Original Accessories a Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device a Multiple power consuming devices can share a single fuse a Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers which switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been eliminated Fuses and light bulbs 189 Fuses in the dash panel Fig 158 Fuse box cover in the dash panel schematic diagram of the fuse box First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 189 The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover gt Remove the cover
108. CD gt Touch the button C Fig 109 and guide the CD compact disc into the CD case B The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD changer The warning light in the corresponding button D stops flashing Communication 119 Filling the CD changer with CDs gt Press and hold the button C Fig 109 for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one after the other maximum 6 CDs into the CD case B The warning lights in the buttons D stop flashing Inserting a CD at a specific position gt Press the button C Fig 109 The warning lights in the buttons D illuminate the memory spaces that are already assigned and flash in the case of free mem ory spaces gt Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD case B Ejecting a CD gt Press the button A Fig 109 to eject a CD For assigned memory spaces the warning lights now illuminate in the buttons D gt Press the corresponding button D The CD is ejected Ejecting all CDs gt Press and hold the button A Fig 109 for more than 2 seconds to eject the CDs All CDs in the CD changer are ejected consecutively Note a Always guide the CD into the CD case B Fig 109 with the printed side facing upwards Never force the CD into the CD case as it is drawn in automatically a After loading a CD into the CD changer wait until the warning light of the corre sponding button D is illuminated Then the
109. CD case B is free to load the next CD a f a position is selected on which a CD is already located this CD is ejected Re move the ejected CD and load the desired CD 120 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Safety equipment _ RT Before setting off 121 What influences the driving safety 122 In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with for example regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children It is therefore important in particular to comply with the notes and warnings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those travelling with you F WARNING This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants You will find further information on safety which concerns you and those travelling with you in the following chapters of this Owner s Manual The complete on board literature should always be in the vehicle This ap plies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle Safety equipment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 The following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle gt three point seat belts for all the seats gt belt force limiter fo
110. Driver seat occupied boot loaded CAUTION Always adjust the headlight range adjustment in such a way that a it does not dazzle other road users especially oncoming traffic and the range is sufficient for safe driving i Note a We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched on Headlights fitted with Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the vehicle e g accelerating braking when the ignition is switched on and when driving Vehicles which are equipped with Xenon bulbs do not have a manual headlight range adjustment control 44 Using the system Switches for the hazard warning light system Fig 27 Dash panel Switch for hazard warning lights First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 gt Press switch A Fig 27 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The warning light for the turn signals and the warning light in the switch also flash at the same time The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is de ployed in the event of an accident i Note The hazard warning light system must be switched on if for example you encounter a traffic congestion a your vehic
111. FI warnine Water ice and grit in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency risk of accident CAUTION Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering This means it is necessary to remove the dirt Note We recommend that any repairs to damaged paintwork are carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Underbody protection First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechani cal influences 152 General Maintenance As damage to the protective layer when driving cannot be ruled out completely we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside of your ve hicle and on the chassis at specific intervals preferably at the beginning and end of the winter KODA Service Partners have suitable spray products and the necessary equip ment available and are familiar with the instructions for use We therefore rec ommend that touch up work or additional corrosion protection measures are car ried out by a KODA Service Partner FI warnine Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filters or heat shields When the
112. Fig 107 A in addition to the button 4 After pressing this button for 2 seconds the number 112 Emergency call is dialled i Note On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system the buttons and do not work Communication 111 Operate the telephone via the information display The following menu points can be selected in the menu Phone Phone book Dial number Call register Voice mailbox Bluetooth Settings Back Phone book In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the tele phone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the menu point Dial number The re quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel Numbers O 9 symbols k and the functions Cancel Call Delete can be selected Call register The following menu items can be selected in the menu item Call register Missed calls Dialled numbers Received calls Voice mailbox In the menu Voice mailbox it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected in the menu Bluetooth User the overview of the stored users New user Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range a Visibility Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices
113. For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels e g additional installation of loudspeakers Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a SKODA specialist garage There must no other persons e g children or animals between the passen ger and the deployment area of the head airbag In addition none of the occu pants should lean their head out of the window when driving or extend their arms and hands out of the window a The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de ployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head air bags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the fitted accessories could be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants page 177 Accessories changes and replacement of parts Deactivating airbags Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances such as if gt using a child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child has its back to the vehicle s direction of travel in some countries
114. If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands free sys tem within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition the visibility of the hands free system can be reestablished for 3 minutes in the following ways gt By turning the ignition off and on gt By turning voice control off and on gt Via the information display in the menu item Bluetooth Visibility Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone Check on your mobile phone if the automatic connection has been established Disconnecting the connection gt By withdrawing the ignition key gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the information display in the menu Bluetooth User Solving connection problems If the system announces No paired phone found check the operating state of the mobile phone gt Is the mobile phone switched on gt Is the PIN code entered gt Is Bluetooth active gt Is the visibility of the mobile phone active gt Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands free system i Note a If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone only use your mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum a Placing the mobile phone in the adapter inserted
115. Information for braking 94 Handbrake 95 Stabilisation Control ESC 95 gt Starting off and Driving 93 Antilock brake system ABS 96 Traction control system TCS O28 Electronic Differential Lock EDS and XDS 97 EI WARNING a The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Greater physi cal effort for braking is required when the engine is switched off risk of acci dent Depress the clutch pedal when stopping or braking a vehicle with a petrol engine and manual transmission in the low rev range If you fail to do so the functionality of the brake booster can be impaired risk of accident a f a front spoiler full wheel trim etc is mounted retrospectively it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced Other wise the functionality of the brake system could be impaired risk of acci dent a Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating which can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system risk of accident Never leave children unattended in the vehicle The children might for ex ample release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear The vehicle might then move off risk of accident a A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down The brake assist systems would then be without function risk of acci d
116. MG6 Top speed km h 219 214 218 213 214 208 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 8 1 8 8 8 2 8 9 8 4 8 7 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1400 1600 14009 15002 1600 1500 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 670 690 670 690 730 750 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI engine Performances OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG7 COMBI MG6 Top speed km h COMBI DSG7 COMBI 4x4 MG6 218 SCOUT MG6 211 Acceleration O 100 km h s 8 1 8 4 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1400 1600 14002 9 15002 1600 15002 0 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 680 670 730 750 Technical data 203 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 147 5100 6000 280 1700 5000 4 1984 Performances OCTAVIA RS MG6 OCTAVIA RS DSG6 COMBI RS MG6 COMBI RS DSG6 Top speed km h 240 239 Acceleration 0O 100 km h s 7 2 7 3 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1400 1600 1400 9 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 650 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 77 14400 250 1500 2500 4 1598 OCTAVIA MG5 OCTAVIA DSG7 COMBI MG5 COMBI MGS G
117. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA Octavia Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual has been systematically designed to make it easy for you to search for and obtain the information you require Chapters table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner s manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy to read chapters The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Sub ject index at the end of the Owner s Manual helps you to rapidly find the informa tion you are looking for Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle Units of measurement All values are expressed in metric units Explanation of symbols a Denotes a reference to a section with important information and safety advice in a chapter Denotes the end of a section Denotes the continuation of a section on the next page Indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possi ble Denotes a registered trademark Ov E Notes EI WARNING The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury CAUTION A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle e
118. TION Only the above mentioned oils can be used on vehicles with flexible service inter vals We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil In exceptional cases a maximum of 0 5 of specification VW 502 00 only for petrol engines or specification VW 505 01 only for diesel engines engine oil can be used to refill once Other engine oils must not be used risk of engine damage Note a Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle We recommend that you use oils from SKODA Original Accessories Vehicle specific information depending on engine type 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 77 5000 175 1550 4100 4 1197 Performances OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG7 COMBI MG6 COMBI DSG7 Top speed km h 191 191 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 9 10 9 Permissible trailer load braked kg 12002 1400 12002 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 640 630 640 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 1 4 Itr 59 kW engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 59 5000 132 3800 4 1390 Performances OCTAVIA EU4 OCTAVIA EU5 COMBI EU4 COMBI EU5 Top speed km h 172 173 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 3 14 4 Permissible tr
119. a dedicated running direction or the opposite running direction drive carefully as the optimum characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situa tion Spare wheel Fig 142 Boot Spare wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and is fixed in place with a special bolt Fig 142 Before removing the spare wheel the box containing the vehicle tool kit must be removed It is important to check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel preferably every time the tyre air pressure is checked see sticker on the fuel filler flap page 171 to ensure it is always ready to use If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adop ted H Replace it with a wheel having the appropriate mode and dimensions as soon as possible Temporary spare wheel A warning label is displayed on the wheel rim of the spare wheel to indicate that your vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare wheel Please observe the following when driving with a temporary spare wheel gt The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel gt Do not drive faster than 80 km h with the temporary spare wheel and
120. able ball rod for the trailer towing device The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts depending on equipment fitted gt wire clamps for removing the full wheel trims gt wheel wrench gt towing eye gt Adapter for anti theft wheel bolts gt Extraction pliers for wheel bolt caps gt Replacement bulb set gt Tool for removing the fog lights Before placing the lifting jack back into its storage area screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully F WARNING The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads risk of injury a Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap 1 Valid for Octavia RS and Octavia Scout CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Preliminary work _ 1880 Changing a wheel 180 Subsequent steps 180 Loosening and tightening wheel bolts si Raising the vehicle 181 Securing wheels against theft 182 F WARNING a f you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal re quirements must be observed In this way you are not only protecting yourself but other road users as well a f the wheel is damaged or i
121. accelerate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable The TCS should normally always be switched on It may be advisable to switch off the system in certain exceptional circumstances such as gt when driving with snow chains gt when driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface gt when it is necessary to rock a vehicle free when it has got stuck Ensure the TCS is switched on again afterwards During an intervention of the system the TCS warning light amp flashes in the in strument cluster The TCS warning light 5 page 21 lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the TCS If necessary the TCS can be switched off and on again by pressing the button Fig 97 or on vehicles with ESP by pressing the button 8 Fig 96 on page 95 The TCS warning light amp lights up in the instrument cluster when the TCS is switched off Electronic Differential Lock EDS and XDS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 93 If one of the wheels starts to spin the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven
122. afety warn ings H on page 91 An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deacti vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is with drawn from the lock The engine will not start if a non authorized ignition key is used The following is displayed in the information display Immobilizer active Fig 94 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 91 Petrol engines 1 Ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine Diesel engines 1 Fuel supply interrupted ignition switched off engine switched off the steer ing can be locked 2 Heating glow plugs on ignition switched on 3 Starting engine To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly If the steering is locked and the key cannot or can only be turned with difficulty into the position 2 Fig 94 move the steering wheel back and forth and the steering lock will unlock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 91 Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The pre glow warning light o gt comes on after the ignitio
123. age compartment We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cool ing system for the storage compartment is not being used a Open close gt Press the handle Fig 68 and the lid folds down gt Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place N Fig 70 Dash panel Storage compart ment on the driver s side The inside of the flap contains pen and note book holders F WARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea sons gt The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and folding open in the direction of arrow Fig 70 b Seats and Stowage 71 EJ warnine The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea SONS Storage compartment on the dash panel Fig 71 Dash panel Stowage compart ment gt Press in the middle of the storage compartment Fig 71 the lid folds open Certain models do not have a storage compartment lid EI WARNING a The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes risk of fire The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety reasons Do not put any highly inflammable objects or objects which are sensitive to heat e g lighters sprays spectacles carbonated drinks in the storage com partment 72 Using the system Stowage compartment in front centre console Fig 72
124. ailer a The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km To protect both vehicles when tow starting or towing the tow rope should be elastic Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a simi larly elastic material One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or jerky loadings There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage result ing at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes or to the detachable ball head of the towing device page 187 or page 188 i Note a We recommend using a tow rope from KODA Original Accessories available from a KODA Service Partner a Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in a When towing respect the national legal provisions especially those which re late to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed a The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle Front towing eye
125. ailer load braked kg 9002 1100 9002 1100 9002 9002 1100 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles Technical data 201 1 4 Itr 90 kW TSI engine 90 5000 200 1500 4000 4 1390 Performances OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG7 COMBI MG6 COMBI DSG7 Top speed km h 203 2057 202 202 2047 201 Acceleration O 100 km h s 9 7 9 8 9 7 9 8 9 97 9 8 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1300 1500 13009 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 650 660 650 660 a The value corresponds to the status with the Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 qd Class N1 vehicles 1 6 Itr 75 kW engine Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 75 5600 148 3800 4 1595 OCTAVIA MG5 OCTAVIA MGS OCTAVIA MG5 COMBI MG5 COMBI MG5 COMBI MG5 Performances EU4 MultiFuel OCTAVIA AG6 EU4 EU5 MultiFuel COMBI AG6 Top speed km h 184 188 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 1 12 4 Permissible trailer load F m braked kg 12002 1400 12002 Permissible trailer load un braked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 202 Technical data 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI engine 112 4300 6200 250 1500 4200 4 1798 Performances OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA AG6 COMBI MG6 COMBI AG6 COMBI 4x4 MG6 SCOUT
126. ake pedal is released The driver can therefore move his foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the slope without having to actuate the handbrake The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds it starts to roll back The uphill start assist is active as of a5 slope if the driver door is closed It is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off When driving down hill it is inactive Antilock brake system ABS First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 93 ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking Thus helping the driver to main tain control of the vehicle 96 Using the system The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during the intervention of the ABS The ABS deactivates if the brake pedal is released Never interrupt the appli cation of the brakes during the intervention of the ABS Traction control system TCS Fig 97 TCS button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 93 The TCS is automatically activated after starting the engine If the wheels are slipping the TCS adapts the engine speed to the conditions of the road surface The TCS makes it much easier to start off
127. ally ab sorbed by the belts The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other pas sive safety measures such as the airbag system also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of in jury Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the ve hicle page 135 EJ warnine a Fasten your seat belt before each journey even when driving in town This also applies to the people seated at the rear risk of injury Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 127 Fastening and unfastening seat belts a Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder on no account across your neck a Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated page 122 Correct seated position a The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness a The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twisted or chafe against any sharp edges Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the
128. amage the catalytic converter The battery from an other vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 185 Jump starting a Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumulation of heat when the engine is switched off SA For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower Starting off and Driving 91 i Note a The engine can only be started with a genuine KODA key with the matching code a The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after Starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem a After switching off the ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx 10 minutes a If the engine does not start up after a second attempt the fuse for the fuel pump glow plug system Diesel engines may have a fault Check the fuse and re place if necessary page 190 Fuses in the dash panel or seek assistance from a SKODA specialist garage We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle This acts as a deterrent against the attempte
129. an occur on the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the covers Seat belts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 148 Keep the seat belts clean Clean dirty seat belts using a mild soapy solution and remove coarse dirt with a soft brush Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from reeling up the belt properly F WARNING a The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning a Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into con tact with corrosive liquids such as acids etc a Seat belts which have damage to the webbing connections inertia reel or lock should be replaced by a KODA specialist garage a Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up 154 General Maintenance This chapter contains information on the following subjects Refuelling 155 Unleaded petrol 156 Ethanol E85 157 Diesel fuel 158 The correct type of fuel for your vehicle and the tyre size and inflation pressure are specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 129 on page 155 B E WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canister in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any
130. and safety warn ings H on page 148 Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches scuffs or traces of chip damage must be treated immediately The KODA Service Partners have a range of matching touch up pens or spray cans available in the colour of your vehicle Note We recommend that any repairs to damaged paintwork are carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Plastic parts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 Plastic parts can be cleaned using a damp cloth If this does not prove to be ade quate the parts can be treated with special solvent free plastic cleaning prod ucts Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts De icing windows and exterior mirrors First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 148 Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir rors The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass Clean the windows from the inside on a regular basis Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose When drying the windows after washing the vehicle do not use window leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the window and reduce visibility CAUTION a Never remove snow or ice from glass
131. anges and impairments of the airbag system TY Do it yourself 178 First aid kit and warning triangle 178 Fire extinguisher 178 Vehicle tool kit 179 Changing a wheel 179 Breakdown kit 182 Jump starting 185 Towing the vehicle 186 Fuses and light bulbs 189 Fuses 189 Bulbs 191 Technicaldata 10 Introductory information 197 Data on the vehicle data sticker and the type plate 197 Dimensions 198 Specifications and engine oil capacity 200 Vehicle specific information depending on engine type 201 Multi purpose vehicles AP 207 4 Table of Contents COzin g km discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilo meter N1 Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta tion of goods Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque TDI CR Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection system TDI PD Diesel engine with injection system and unit injector injection system Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection Abbreviations 12 13 14 15 Fig 1 Cockpit 6 Using the system Using the system Overview hi 2 3 4 k Nile 8 5 gt fa v e w 3 5 a Electric windows Electric exterior mirror adjustment Air outlet vents Lever for the multifunction switch gt Turn signal light headlight and parking light headlight flasher gt Speed regulatin
132. ark the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 20 Using the system Coolant temperature coolant level If the warning light lights up or flashes either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low The following is displayed in the information display Check coolant Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine check the level of the coolant page 163 and refill the coolant if necessary page 163 If the coolant is within the specified range the increased temperature may be caused by an operating problem at the radiator fan Check the fuse for the radia tor fan replace if necessary page 191 Fuses in the engine compartment If the warning light does not go off even though the coolant level is correct and the fuse for the fan is in working order do not continue driving Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EI WARNING a f you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 a Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle If the engine is hot the cooling system is pressurized risk of scalding It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap Do not touch the radiator fan The radiator fan may switch itself on auto matically e
133. arting off and driving 103 Selector lever positions 103 Manual shifting of gears Tiptronic 104 Selector lever lock 105 Kickdown function 105 Dynamic shift programme 105 Emergency programme 106 Selector lever emergency unlocking 106 EI WARNING Do not depress the accelerator if changing the position of the selector lever when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running risk of accident Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving risk of an accident When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary it is necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever ex cept P and N since the power transmission is never completely interrupted also not when the engine is idling the vehicle creeps a The selector lever must be placed into position P and the handbrake firmly applied before the bonnet can be opened and work on the running engine can be completed risk of accident The safety guidelines must always be ob served page 158 Engine compartment 1 Applies to DSG 102 Using the system HE WARNING Continued a f stopping on a hill downhill gradient never try to maintain the vehicle sta tionary with the gear engaged by means of the accelerator pedal i e by let ting the clutch slip This can lead to overheating of the clutch If there is a risk of overheating of the clutch due to overload the clutch is opened automati cally and the
134. arts of the vehicle gt Never stop in the water do not reverse and do not switch the engine off gt Deactivate the START STOP system before driving through water page 100 START STOP FI warnine a Driving through water mud sludge etc can reduce the braking power and extend the braking distance risk of accident a Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking Only apply the brakes for the pur pose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy CAUTION a When driving through bodies of water parts of the vehicle such as the engine gearbox chassis or electrics can be severely damaged a Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle 144 Driving Tips a Potholes mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or im possible to drive through the body of water a Do not drive through salt water The salt can lead to corrosion Any vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water After driving through a body of water we recommend that the vehicle is checked by a SKODA specialist garage Technical requirements If your vehicle has already been factory fitted wit
135. ary heating aux iliary heating and ventilation on the operating part of the air con ditioning system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 87 The auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventilation can be directly switched on or off at any time using the button 8 Fig 91 on the operating part of the air conditioning system on the operating part of the Climatronic system or via the ra dio remote control page 89 If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is not switched off earlier it switches off automatically after the set operating period in the menu Running time has ex pired System settings First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 87 The following menu items can be selected in the menu Aux heating in the infor mation display depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle Day of the wk Set the current weekday Time Set the desired running time in 5 minute increments The running time can be 10 to 60 minutes Mode Set the desired heating ventilation mode Starting time 1 3 In each pre set time the day and the time hour and minute can be set for switching on the auxiliary heating and or ventilation An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the day If this empty position is selected the activation is performed without taking into account the day Activate Enable
136. as not re ceived Flashes orange for 5 seconds The battery is discharged however the switching on or off signal was not re ceived CAUTION The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore be protected against water severe impacts and direct sunlight Changing the battery of the radio remote control First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 87 If the warning light on the radio remote control indicates a weak or discharged battery C Fig 92 on page 89 it must be replaced The battery is located under a cover B Fig 92 on page 89 on the back of the radio remote control gt Insert a flat blunt object such as a coin into the gap on the battery cover turn the cover in the opposite direction of the arrow up to the mark and unlock it gt Change the battery replace the battery cover and lock it by moving it in the di rection of the arrow SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of the old battery in accordance with environmental regulations Note a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery a The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat tery 90 Using the system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Adjusting the steering wheel position 92 Electromechanical power steering 92 Electronic immobiliser 9
137. asten gt Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt page 58 Adjusting removing and installing a head restraint gt Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis gt Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle Fig 113 A that is part of the seat until it clicks into place gt Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maximum protection The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis must not be positioned across the stomach and must always fit snugly Fig 114 2 Expectant women must also always wear a Seat belt This is the only way of en suring optimal protection for the unborn child On expectant mothers the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen Fig 114 D Release Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary gt Press the red button in the belt buckle Fig 113 B the lock tongue pops out gt Manually guide the belt back so that it i
138. ate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature dis play that there is no ice on the road Even at temperatures around 4 C black ice may still be on the road surface warning drive with care i Note a In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of meas ures a f the display of the second speed is activated in mph the current speed is not indicated in km h on the display 12 Using the system HOS Multifunction display I7 20 RANG First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 12 The multifunction display is equipped with two automatic memories The selected memory is shown in the Display Fig 5 The data of the single trip memory memory 1 is shown if a 1 appears in the dis play A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance mem ory memory 2 Switching over the memory using the button B Fig 6 on page 13 on the wind screen wiper lever or using the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steer ing wheel Single trip memory memory 1 The single trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ig nition is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the cal culation of the current driving information if t
139. ating the alarm sys tem Window open close Fig 18 Buttons on the driver s door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 34 The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on Opening gt A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door The opening process stops when one releases the button gt Additionally the window can be opened automatically fully open by pressing the button to the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door The closing process stops when one releases the button gt Additionally the window can be closed automatically fully closed by pulling the button to the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately The buttons for the individual windows are located in the armrest of the driver s door Fig 18 front passenger seat and in the rear doors Fig 19 on page 36 Buttons of the power windows A Button for power window of the driver s door Button for power window of the front passenger door Button for power window of the rear right door D Button for power window at the rear left door S Safety pushbutton Safety pushbutton The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by pressing the safety pushbutton S Fig 18 The button
140. automatically At a speed increase of more than 8 km h the previous wiper setting is established again a f there is an obstacle on the windscreen the wiper will try to push away the obstacle If the obstacle continues to block the wiper the wiper stops automati cally after 5 attempts to eliminate the obstacle in order to avoid a damage to the wiper Remove the the obstacle and switch the wiper on again a The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx 10 C a The content of the windscreen washer fluid reservoir is 3 litres On vehicles fit ted with the headlight cleaning system the volume is 5 5 litres On vehicles fitted with auxiliary heating the content of the windscreen wiper reservoir is 4 5 litres a The wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windscreen clean er to avoid any smears The wiper blades should be cleaned with a sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues for example Activating the windscreen wipers and washers HOMS Windscreen wiper lever First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 Flick wipe gt If you only wish to wipe the windscreen briefly push the lever into the spring tensioned position 4 Fig 35 If the lever is held in the lower position for more than 1 second the wiper wipes faster Periodic wiping gt Position the l
141. ay radio systems 107 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel 108 Symbols in the information display 109 Phone Phonebook ___ CS lt 7 109 Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II _____ 109 Universal telephone preinstallation GSM Ill _ 112 Voice control Multimedia Safety Passive Safety General information Correct seated position Seat belts Seat belts Airbag system Description of the airbag system Front airbags Side airbags Head airbags Deactivating airbags Transporting children safely Child seat Driving Tips Driving and the Environment The first 1500 km Catalytic converter Economical and environmentally friendly driving Environmental compatibility Driving abroad Avoiding damage to your vehicle Driving through water on the street Towing a trailer Towing a trailer General Maintenance Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle Taking care of your vehicle Table of Contents T16 118 121 121 122 125 125 129 129 130 131 132 133 135 135 139 139 139 140 142 143 143 144 145 145 148 148 Inspecting and replenishing 155 Fuel BS Engine compartment 158 Vehicle battery 165 Wheels and Tyres 170 Tyres 170 Accessories changes and replacement of parts _ 177 Introductory information 177 Ch
142. bjects are able to slip forward if any sudden driving or braking manoeuvres are un dertaken risk of injury When transporting fastened objects which are sharp and dangerous in the boot that has been enlarged by folding the rear seats forward ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats page 123 Cor rect seated position for the occupants on the rear seats a f the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied ensure maxi mum safety e g by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision a Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning a Under no circumstances should the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle be exceeded risk of accident Never transport people in the boot CAUTION Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the follow ing a heating elements in the rear window a elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window a elements of the aerial integrated in the rear side windows Estate car i Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 171 Service life of tyres Class N1 vehicles First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 60 On class N1 vehicles which are not fitted with a protect
143. c tions for the factory fitted radio and navigation system Fig 108 The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices A description is included in the relevant operating instructions If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or navi gation system The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons Fig 108 Multifunction steering wheel control buttons Button Action Radio traffic information CD CD changer MP3 Navigation Press briefly Switch off on tone or voice control Press button for a long period of time switch off on Turn upwards Increase volume Turn downwards Decrease volume Changing to the next stored radio station Press briefly Changing to the next stored traffic information Changing to the next title Interrupting the traffic report Press button for a long period of time NM amp Ele el E Interruption of the traffic report Fast forward gt 118 Using the system Button Action Press briefly Radio traffic information Changing to the previously stored radio station Changing to the previously stored traffic information Interrupting the traffic report CD CD changer MP3 Changing to the previous title Press button for a long period of time Interruption of the traffic
144. cally activated each time the ignition is switched on In the start stop mode the engine automatically switches to the vehicle s idle phase e g when stopped at traffic lights Information regarding the current state of the START STOP system is indicated in the display of the instrument cluster Automatic engine shut down stop phase gt Stop the vehicle where necessary apply the handbrake gt Take the vehicle out of gear gt Release the clutch pedal Automatic renewed engine restart start phase gt Depress the clutch pedal Switching the START STOP system on and off The START STOP system can be switched on off by pressing the button Fig 101 When start stop mode is deactivated the warning light in the button lights up If the vehicle is in the stop phase when manually switching off the system the engine starts immediately The START STOP system is very complex Some of the procedures are hard to check without servicing The general conditions for the proper functioning of the START STOP system are listed in the following overview Conditions for the automatic engine shut down stop phase gt The gearshift lever is in Neutral gt The clutch pedal is not depressed gt The driver has fastened the seat belt gt The driver s door is closed gt The bonnet is closed gt The vehicle is at a standstill gt The factory fitted towing device is not electrically connected to a trailer gt The en
145. ch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelera tor particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox gt On vehicles with a manual transmission only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the towed vehicle gt Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not blocked and so that the turn signal lights horn windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system can be switched on gt Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the en gine is running If the engine is not running significantly more physical force is re quired to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle If using a tow rope ensure that it is always kept taught CI CAUTION a Do not tow start the engine danger of damaging the engine On vehicles with a catalytic converter unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite This in turn may damage or destroy the catalytic converter The bat tery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 185 J ump start ing a f the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect your vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or on a special vehicle transporter or tr
146. changing the wheel the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque a Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked Loosening and tightening wheel bolts Fig 148 Changing a wheel Loosening the wheel bolts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 179 Loosening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn to the left Fig 148 Tightening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop gt Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is tight FJ warninc Undo the wheel bolts only a little about one turn as long as the vehicle has not yet been jacked up risk of an accident 1 Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti theft wheel bolts page 182 i Note If it proves difficult to undo the bolts carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foodt Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so and make sure you keep your footing Raising the vehicle Fig 149 Changing a wheel Jacking points for positioning lifting jack Fig 150 Attach lifting jack First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 179 Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point that is closest to the faulty wheel Fig 14
147. children safely Two way radio systems Type plate Tyre repair Tyres see Wheels and tyres U Underbody protection unlock Central locking system Unlocking Remote control Uphill start assist V Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation Charging Checking the electrolyte level Operation in winter Replacing Safety instructions Vehicle condition see Auto Check Control Vehicle data sticker Vehicle dimensions Vehicle key Vehicle tool kit Visors 145 145 60 66 135 107 197 182 172 152 28 30 95 169 168 167 167 168 165 17 197 198 26 179 47 W Warning lights 18 Warning symbols 18 see Warning lights Warning triangle Washing Automatic car wash system by hand Chrome parts High pressure cleaner Weights Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel bolt Caps Loosening and tightening Wheels Wheels and tyres Changing a wheel Full wheel trim General information Handling wheels and tyres new tyres Service life of tyres Snow chains Spare wheel Wheel bolts Winter tyres Window convenience operation Windows De icing See electric power windows Windscreen see Radio reception Windscreen washer fluid Checking Replenishing Warning light Winter 178 148 149 149 150 149 197 182 174
148. cle Certain outside climatic con ditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle a Under no circumstances allow children to be transported without the use of a suitable restraint system In the event of an accident the child will be thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries and also injure other occupants I WARNING Continued a Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehi cle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the air bag system is deployed a Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents a Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fittings a t is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat Further information page 135 Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat i Note We recommend that you use child seats from KODA Original Accessories Thes
149. cluster amp page 22 The following systems are integrated into the electronic stabilisation control ESC gt Antilock brake system ABS gt Traction control TCS Starting off and Driving 95 gt Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDS gt Active driver steering recommendation DSR gt Brake assist gt Uphill start assist Active driver steering recommendation DSR This function indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommenda tion in order to stabilise the vehicle The active driver steering recommendation is activated for example on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces Hydraulic brake assist The brake assist system is activated by the very quick operation of the brake ped al e g in the event of danger It increases the braking effect and helps to short en the braking distance To achieve the shortest possible braking distance the brake pedal must be applied firmly and held in this position until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the brake assist system The brake assist function is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released Uphill start assist The uphill start assist makes it easier to start off on steep hills The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx 2 seconds after the br
150. cy unlocking of the boot lid page 34 Safe securing system The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it be gins to flash evenly at longer intervals It is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside This acts as an effec tive deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle The safe securing system can be deactivated within 2 seconds by double locking the vehicle If the safe securing system is not operating the warning light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer in tervals after about 30 seconds The safe securing system is activated again the next time the vehicle is unlocked and locked If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated the door can be unlocked and opened from the inside by pulling on the opening lever of the respective door By the first pull on the opening lever the door is unlocked By the second pull on the opening lever the door is opened 28 Using the system EI warnine If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti vated there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then no longer pos sible to open either a door or a window from the inside
151. d the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving If you operate the kickdown function the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line with the vehicle speed and engine speed Note The kickdown function is also available when manually shifting gears Selector lever lock First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 102 Automatic selector lever lock With the ignition on the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and N The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever out of this posi tion The warning light page 25 Selector lever lock illuminates in the in strument cluster as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in the po sitions P and N The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N e g from R to D This for example helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck The selec tor lever lock will click into place if the lever is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed of less than 5 km hour The lock is switched off automatically into position N when the car is travelling at a higher speed Shiftlock button The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever positions being engaged inadvertently The selector lever loc
152. d back Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags and to the top fully Move the backrest into the vertical position risk of injury The front passenger airbag must be reactivated as soon as you no longer use a child seat on the front passenger seat Classification of child seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 135 Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups Weight of the child Approximate age 0 0 10 kg up to 9 months O up to 13 kg up to 18 months 136 Safety Weight of the child 9 18 kg Approximate age up to 4 years 15 25 kg up to 7 years 22 36 kg over 7 years Suitability of child seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 135 Overview of the suitability of child seats according to the standard ECE R 44 Child seat type Front passenger seat U Seat Rear seat outside U Rear seat middle u U Universal category a child seat with the word UNIVERSAL which is de signed for fastening on the seat with the seat belt ISOFIX a child seat which is designed for fastening on the seat with eyelets for the ISOFIX system is provided page 137 Child seats with the ISOFIX system ISOFIX a child seat which is designed for fastening on the seat with an eye let for the TOP TETHER system is provided page 137 Child seat with th
153. d observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 33 After unlocking the vehicle you can open the lid by pushing the handle located above the licence plate Opening gt Push the handle and lift the boot lid in the direction of the arrow Fig 16 Closing gt Pull down the boot lid and close it with a slight swing A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the boot lid Automatic locking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 33 If the vehicle was locked with the button 8 on the remote control key before the boot lid was closed the lid is automatically locked as soon as it is closed The delayed automatic locking function of the boot lid can be activated on your vehicle The following applies following activation of this function If the boot lid was locked with the button s on the remote control key 2 page 30 then it is possible to open the lid within a limited period of it being closed If you wish a SKODA Service Partner can activate or deactivate the delayed auto matic locking of the boot lid The Service Partner will also provide any further in formation that is required Unlocking and locking 33 There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked au tomatically Always lock the vehicle using the button amp on the remote control or with the key if no remote control is avai
154. d safety warn ings H on page 158 The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet page 160 gt Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle Fig 135 The cool ant level when the engine is cold must lie between the B MIN and A MAX markings The level may also rise slightly above the A MAX marking when the engine is warm If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low this is indicated by the warning light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 20 Coolant tem perature coolant level We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system Do not merely top up the coolant Have the cooling system checked by a SKODA spe cialist garage immediately CAUTION If a fault causes the engine to overheat we recommend visiting a KODA Service Partner immediately otherwise serious engine damage may occur Replenishing the coolant First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 158 gt Switch off the engine gt Allow the engine to cool gt Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir Fig 135 on page 163 and unscrew the cap carefully gt Replenish the coolant gt Turn the cap until it clicks into place Do
155. d theft of your car Adjusting the steering wheel position Fig 93 Adjustable steering wheel Lever below the steering wheel safe dis tance to the steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 91 The height and forward back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted gt First of all adjust the driver s seat page 55 Manually adjusting the front seats gt Pull the lever below the steering wheel down Fig 93 A gt Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position with regard to the height and forward back position gt Push the lever upwards to the stop 92 Using the system Electromechanical power steering First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 91 The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force With the electromechanical power steering the steering assist is automatically adapted to the speed and to the steering angle It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the en gine is not running vehicle being towed in However greater physical effort is required to turn the steering wheel If there is a fault in the power steering the warning light or lights up in the instrument cluster page 21 Electromechanical power steering Electronic immobiliser First read and observe the introductory information and s
156. d too tightly it can cause damage to the anti theft wheel bolt and adapter Note a The anti theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a KODA Serv ice Partner a The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel Preliminary work First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 179 The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel gt In the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic The place you choose should be level gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the automatic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Ifa trailer is connected remove it gt Remove the vehicle tool kit page 179 and the spare wheel page 173 from the boot 180 Do it yourself Changing a wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 179 Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible gt Remove the full wheel trim page 174 or caps page 174 gt In the case of light alloy wheel rims remove the wheel trim cap page 174 gt First of all slacken the anti theft wheel bolt and then th
157. downwards The next menu selection name Quickly turn upwards To the previous initial letter in the telephone book Quickly turn downwards To the next initial letter in the telephone book a Applies to GSM Il b Applies to GSM II hi fi fi 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 108 Using the system Symbols in the information display Importance Charge status of the phone battery Valid for GSM II GSM III Signal strength GSM II GSM Ill a phone is connected to the hands free system GSM II GSM Ill when connected via the HFP profile The hands free system is visible to other devices GSM II GSM Ill when connected via the HFP profile a phone is connected to the hands free system GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile The hands free system is visible to other devices GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile A multimedia unit is connected to the hands free system GSM II GSM Ill A UMTS network is available GSM Ill Internet connection via the hands free system a This function is only supported by some mobile phones Phone Phonebook A phone phonebook is part of the hands free system This phone phonebook can be used depending on the type of mobile phone After the first connection of the telephone the system begins to load the phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit Each time the telephone has
158. e TOP TETHER system Child seats with the ISOFIX system Fig 123 Rear seat ISOFIX 812 0454 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 135 There are two fixing eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the front passenger seat for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place On the rear outside seats the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery The places are marked with labels with the ISOFIX logo Fig 123 A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle fitted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type of vehicle Further information is available from a SKODA Service Partner EJ WARNING a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system a Never attach other child seats belts or objects to the locking eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system hazard hia Note Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from SKODA Original Acces sories Child seat with the TOP TETHER system Fig 124 Rear seat TOP TETHER 2 O o ORED First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 135 There are fixing eyes on the rear side of the rear seat backrests for attaching the fixing belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER system Fig 1
159. e child seats were developed and also tested for use in SKODA vehicles They fulfil the ECE R 44 standard Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Fig 121 Sticker on the B column on the front passenger side oN B12 0391 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 135 For safety reasons we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible Transporting children safely 135 The following guidelines must be observed when using a child safety seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger Seat gt Switch off the front passenger airbag page 133 Deactivating airbags gt Slide the front passenger seat all the way back gt Move the front passenger seat backrest into the vertical position gt Set the height adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible gt Adjust the seat belt for the front passenger seat so that it is as high as possible not suitable for a child seat fastened with the ISOFIX system gt Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac cording to the specifications in the manufacturer s user manual of the child Seat Child safety and side airbag m WARNING Fig 122 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured a It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attach Eis Udcll ale Ae
160. e speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident with your hands is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 km h to 50 km h the forces that your body is exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a tonne 1 000 kg In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the car such as steering wheel dash panel or windscreen Fig 112 A In certain circum stances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a dan ger not only to himself but also for those seated at the front Fig 112 B Fastening and unfastening seat belts Fig 114 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Rout ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 125 F
161. e 181 gt After removing the adapter reinstall the full wheel trim or place the cap onto the anti theft wheel bolt gt Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible It is advisable to make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the anti theft wheel bolt This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from a SKODA Service Partner if necessary 182 Do it yourself We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Components of the breakdown kit 183 Preparing to use the breakdown kit CC Y 184 Sealing and inflating tyres 184 Check after driving for 10 minutes 185 The breakdown kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the boot Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to approx 4 mm Do not remove foreign bodies e g screws or nails from the tyre The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately Repairs with the breakdown kit do not in any way replace a permanent repair of the tyre it only serves to reach the next SKODA specialist garage The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances gt if there is damage to the wheels gt in outside tempe
162. e check the oil level at regular intervals preferably every time after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A but not above if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motor way trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high moun tain pass The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is too low page 21 Engine oil In this case check the oil level with the dip stick as soon as possible Add oil accordingly CAUTION The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range A Fig 134 Risk of damaging the exhaust system Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the prevailing conditions Switch off the engine and obtain professional assistance from a SKODA specialist garage otherwise it could cause severe engine damage Note Engine oil specifications page 200 Specifications and engine oil capacity Replenishing the engine oil First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 gt Check the engine oil level page 161 gt Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening gt Replenish the oil in portions of 0 5 litres in accordance with the correct specifi cations page 200 Specifications and engine oil capacity gt Check t
163. e compartment is equipped with a lockable inlet for thermally treated warmed up air When the air vent is opened the air flows into the stowage compartment with a temperature corresponding to the control dial settings on the A C unit depending on the outer climate conditions 74 Using the system The air inlet in the storage compartment is connected to position 47 through ad justment of the control dial for air distribution This setting causes the maximum amount of air to flow into the storage compartment depending on the rotary reg ulator position for the fan Fig 80 Centre console at rear Stowage The storage compartment can for example be used to temper drinks cans etc compartment If you do not use the air inlet in the storage compartment the inlet should al ways be kept closed i Note Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the hand brake E The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert gt Open the storage compartment by pulling on the upper edge A in the direction of arrow Fig 80 Fig 79 EJ warninec The armrest at the rear The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes risk of fire The armrest can be folded down to increase comfort The armrest includes a storage compartment The compartment is opened by pressing the button on the front Fig 79 and raising the cover E
164. e depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle This Owner s Manual shows you how to use your SKODA vehi cle with utmost care for the environment while driving eco nomically at the same time Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner s Manual that are marked amp below Work with us for the sake of the environment Navod k obsluze Octavia Laura anglicky 11 2012 64 5610 12 20 1ZO 012 031H
165. e engine the ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again If the warning light does not light up after you switch the engine back on the ESR is fully functional again If the warning light amp lights up there is a fault in the ESC The following is displayed in the information display Error Electronic Stability Control ESC Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 95 Stabilisation Control ESC Note If the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected the warning light amp comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light must go out after driving a short distance 22 Using the system Antilock brake system ABS If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the ABS The following is displayed in the information display Error ABS The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 96 Antilock brake system ABS EI WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 a f the warning light is displayed simultaneously with warning light do not continue your journey Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the
166. e established with the help of the following profiles of Bluetooth technology rSAP Remote SIM access profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile the telephone deregisters from the GSM network and communication with the network is only enabled by the control unit via the vehicle s external aerial In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth remains active In this case you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the hands free system deactivate the Bluetooth connection or dial the emergency number 112 only valid in some countries HFP Hands Free Profile After connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the HFP profile the telephone continues to use its GMS module and the internal antenna to com municate with the GSM network Note The following guidelines must be observed page 107 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the phone to the hands free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system it is necessary to inter connect the telephone and hands free system Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection Connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch
167. e filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt on a reg ular basis If the warning light lights up soot has accumulated in the diesel particulate filter To clean the diesel particle filter the vehicle should be driven at an even speed of at least 60 km h H at engine speeds of 1800 2 500 rpm for at least 15 mi nutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged auto matic gearbox position S when the traffic situation permits it The warning light only goes out after the diesel particulate filter has been successfully cleaned If the filter is not properly cleaned the warning light does not go out and the warning light oo begins to flash The following is displayed in the information display Diesel particulate filter Owner s manual Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EJ WARNING a The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures Therefore do not park in areas where the hot filter can come into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials risk of fire a Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traffic condi tions The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic CAUTION As long as the warning light lights up one must take into account an in creased fuel consumptio
168. e fold down from the wind screen Before replacing the wiper arms must be placed in the service position Service position for changing wiper blades gt Closing the bonnet gt Switch the ignition off and on again gt Then press the windscreen wiper lever into position 4 Fig 35 on page 49 within 20 seconds the wiper arms move into the service position Removing the wiper blade gt Fold the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen and position the wiper blade at a right angle to the wiper arm gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow Fig 36 Attaching the wiper blade gt Slide the wiper blade over the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade into the ver tical position gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arms back to the windscreen and turn on the ignition By press ing the window wiper lever into the sprung position 4 Fig 36 or when driving at a speed greater than 4 km h the windscreen wiper arms move back into the rest position Windshield wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust insect remains and preserving wax Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left on the windshield by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems It is therefore important to degrease the lips of the windshield wiper blades after ev er
169. e ignition the radiator fan can intermittently continue to op erate for approx 10 minutes Checking the brake fluid Fig 136 Engine compartment Brake fluid reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet page 160 gt Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir Fig 136 The level must be be tween the MIN and MAX markings When driving a slight drop in the fluid level is caused by the wear and tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads and is therefore perfectly normal There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system however if the fluid lev el drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the MIN marking If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the warning light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 19 Brake system 164 General Maintenance FI WARNING If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking do not continue your journey risk of accident Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Changing the brake fluid First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 Brake fluid absorbs moisture Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosi
170. e language for the warning and information texts here MFD displays Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here Comfort This is where the following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted Switch on off the function for automatically closing the window and panoramic tilt slide sunroof in a locked ve hicle when it starts raining If the function is set and it is not raining the windows including the panoramic tilt slide sunroof will close automatically after approx 12 hours Rain closing Central locking Switch on off the central locking and automatic locking function Switch on off the audible signal indicating activation of the anti theft alarm system ATA confirm Window op Only convenience mode for the driver window or for all of the windows can be adjusted here Mirror down Switch on off the function for mirror lowering on the front passenger side when engaging the reverse gear Mirror adjust Switch on off the function for left and right exterior mirror setting simultaneously Factory Serung Restore the Convenience factory setting a This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor b This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat Lights and visibility This is where the following functions can be activated deactivated or adjusted Coming Home Switch on off and adjust the
171. e mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steering wheel the adapter radio or the navigation system The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following functions gt Phone Phonebook page 109 gt Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering wheel page 108 Communication 109 gt Managing telephone calls via the adapter page 111 gt Operation of the telephone via the information display page 112 gt Voice control of the telephone page 116 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 118 All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle s hands free system is established with the help of Bluetooth technology The adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the vehicle s exter nal aerial Note The following guidelines must be observed page 107 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system the two devices must be paired Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone The following steps must be carried out for the connection gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the menu Phone New user in the information display and wait until the cont
172. e other wheel bolts page 181 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground page 181 gt Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc gt Remove the wheel gt Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts gt Lower the vehicle gt Alternately tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench crosswise and then tighten the anti theft wheel bolt page 181 gt Reinstall the wheel trim wheel trim cap or the caps Note a All bolts must be clean and must turn easily a Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts a When fitting unidirectional tyres ensure that the direction of rotation is cor rect page 170 Subsequent steps First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 179 The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel gt Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special screw page 173 gt Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided gt Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible gt Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible gt Change the damaged wheel or consult a SKODA specialist garage about repair possibilities i Note a If it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
173. e relevant eye immediately with clear water for several minutes Then consult a doctor immediately a Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water If acid was swallowed seek immediate medical attention Keep children away from the vehicle battery a When you charge a battery hydrogen is released and a highly explosive gas mixture is also produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit e g through metal objects cables Possible consequences of a short circuit Melting of lead struts explo sion and burning of the battery jets of acid spurting out a t is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light to smoke or to carry out any activities which produce sparks Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury 166 General Maintenance HE WARNING Continued Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the engine the ignition and all of the electrical components and disconnect the negative terminal on the battery If you wish to replace a bulb it suffices to switch off the relevant light a Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery risk of explosion and caustic burns Replace a frozen vehicle battery a
174. ead airbag 132 210 Index Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system Headlights Driving abroad Headlight cleaning system Head restraint Heating Defrosting windows 50 143 50 58 80 81 Exterior mirror Rear window Recirculated air mode Seats 52 47 82 57 Heating rear window Horn 47 Ignition Ignition lock Immobiliser Information display see MAXI DOT 93 93 92 15 Instrument cluster Instrument lighting Interior monitor Internet connection ISOFIX J Jacking points Raise vehicle Jump starting L Lever Main beam Turn signal 43 32 115 137 181 185 45 45 Light Automatic driving lamp control 40 Cockpit 45 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function 4 Daylight driving light 40 Fog lights 42 Fog lights with the function CORNER 42 Hazard warning light system 44 Headlight beam adjustment 44 Headlight flasher 45 Low beam 40 Main beam 45 Parking light 40 41 Rear fog light 43 Replacing bulbs 191 Tourist light 42 Turn signal 45 Lights Cornering lights 41 switching on and off 40 Warning lights 18 Loads 197 Lock Central locking system 29 Locking Emergency locking 32 Remote control 30 Locking and unlocking from the inside 29 Luggage compartment Folding double hooks 62 Folding hooks 62 M MAXI DOT 15 Main menu 15 Se
175. eather even when used correctly This particularly applies to light seat covers fabric or leather This is not a defect in the seat cover but poor col our fastness of the clothing textiles Fabric covers on electrically heated seats First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 Do not clean the seat covers using moisture as this can damage the seat heating system Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers Natural leather First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 Depending on the amount of wear and tear the leather should be cleaned ona regular basis Normal cleaning Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or woollen cloth Severe soiling Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no water gets into the stitching of the seams Dry off the leather with a soft dry cloth Removing stains Remove fresh water based stains e g coffee tea juices blood with an absorb ent cloth or household cleaning paper A specific cleaning agent is required for dried on stains Remove fresh grease based stains e g butter mayonnaise chocolate etc with an absorbent cloth household cleaning paper or use a Suitable cleaner if the Stain has not yet penetrated into the surface Use a grease solvent for grease stains which have dried in Remove specific
176. ection A notebook can for example be connected to the Internet via the hands free system The control unit of the hands free system supports the GPRS EDGE and UMTS 3G technologies An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the rSAP profile The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be connected Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device Process of connection gt Connect the mobile phone with the hands free system gt Set the access point depending on the operator usually Internet in the menu Phone Settings Data gt Switch on the visibility of the hands free system for the other devices in the menu Phone Bluetooth Visibility Communication 115 gt Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth devi ces gt Select the hands free system as standard SKODA_BT from the list of found devices gt Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instructions given on this device or in the information display gt Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser The operating sys tem requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access de pending on the operator usually 99 Dialogue The period of time durin
177. ection is established with a fourth mobile phone one of the users must be deleted a When connecting to the hands free system follow the instructions on your mo bile phone Operate the telephone via the information display If no telephone is connected with the hands free system after you select the Phone menu the message No paired phone found will appear and the following menu items Help this menu item appears when no paired phone is stored in the memory of the control unit Connect this menu item appears when one or more paired phones are stored in the memory of the control unit New user Media player Active device Paired devices Search Visibility SOS If a telephone is coupled with the hands free system the following menu items can be selected in the menu Phone Phone book In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the tele phone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone The following functions are available for each phone contact Display telephone number Voice Tag Replay Record 1 Only applies when connecting the telephone with the hands free system via the rSAP profile 114 Using the system Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the menu point Dial number The re quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel The numbers 0 9 symbols gt k and the functio
178. ection reduce the speed shift down into the next lower gear manual gearbox or select a lower drive position automatic gearbox As a result the braking effect of the engine will be used reducing the load on the brakes Any additional braking should be completed intermittently not continuously a Changes to the vehicle e g to the engine brakes chassis or another combina tion of tyres and wheels can influence the functionality of the brake assist sys tems page 177 Accessories changes and replacement of parts a f a fault occurs in the ABS system the ESC ASR and EDL also do not work A warning light page 22 comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system Information for braking First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 93 Wear and tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted If operated under severe conditions the thickness of the brake pads must be checked by a SKODA specialist garage before the next service appointment Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Corrosion Co
179. ed after being opened again Automatic locking and unlocking All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed of about 15 km h If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again In addition it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by press ing the central locking button page 29 The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by pulling on the opening lever of the respective door By the first pull on the opening lever the door is un locked By the second pull on the opening lever the door is opened Unlocking and locking 27 EI warnine Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside for exam ple at road crossings Locked doors do however make it more difficult for res cuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency danger to life Note a You can have the individual settings activated by a KODA Service Partner or you can activate them yourself with the help of the information display page 16 Settings a In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehi cle a Only the driver s door can be unlocked or locked using the key if the central locking system fails page 28 The other doors and the boot lid can be manually locked or unlocked a Emergency locking of the door page 32 a Emergen
180. ed devices for the connection to the internet Active device Paired devices Phone name the possibility to change the name of the hands free system pre set SKODA UHV Settings The following menu items can be selected in the menu Settings Phone book Update scan the telephone book Select memory SIM amp phone SIM card Mobile phone Initial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card it is necessary to switch to the menu item SIM amp phone List Surname First name Own number optionally display your own telephone number on the display of the device of the person you are calling this function is network dependent Network depnd Yes No Signal settings Ring tone Volume Turn vol up Turn vol down Phone settings Select operator Automatic Manual Network mode GSM Automatic SIM mode valid for telephones with the rSAP profile that simultaneously support the operation of two SIM cards there is an option to choose which SIM card should be connected to the hands free system Change Phone Mode Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode Premium rSAP mode Hands free HFP mode Off time Setting in five minute steps Data Settings for the Internet access point ask network operator for details Switch off ph Switch off ph switches off the phone unit phone remains coupled Back Return in the main menu of the information display Internet conn
181. ed position 7 Fig 35 the washer system is activated immediately while the windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later The wiper and washer system will operate as long as the lever is held in this position gt Release the lever The washer system stops and the wiper continues for anoth er 2 to 3 wiper strokes depending on the duration of the spraying process The lever will stay in position after releasing it 6 Switching windscreen wipers off gt Move the lever back into the home position 0 Fig 35 Winter position If the windscreen wipers are in rest position they cannot be folded out from the windscreen For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily This rest position is set as follows gt Switch on the windscreen wipers gt Switch off the ignition The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when switching off the ignition The service position can also be used as a winter position page 51 Automatic rear window wiper Combi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 If the windscreen wiper is in position 2 Fig 35 on page 49 or 3 the rear win dow is wiped every 30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle s speed exceeds 5 km h When the rain sensor is active the lever is in the position 1 the function is only active if the windscreen wipers operate
182. eed which is identical to the display of the speedometer 2 Fig 2 on page 8 is indicated on the display Oil temperature If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present is displayed instead of the oil temperature Warning against excessive speeds First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 12 Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary gt With the button A Fig 6 on page 13 or if applicable the adjustment wheel D select the menu item Warning against excessive speeds gt Press the button B or D to activate the ability to set the speed limit value flashes gt Set the desired speed limit e g 50 km h with the button A or if applicable the adjustment wheel D gt Press the button B or D to confirm the set speed limit or wait approx 5 sec onds and the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing This allows you to set the speed in 5 km h intervals Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving gt With the button A Fig 6 on page 13 or if applicable the adjustment wheel D select the menu item Warning against excessive speeds gt Drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h gt Press the button B or D to accept the current speed as the speed limit the value flashes If you wish to change the set speed limit it is changed in 5 km h
183. em the Climatronic information is also shown on their displays This function can be switched off see operating instructions for the radio or navigation system Overview of the control elements Fig 90 Climatronic Control elements The buttons Defrost windscreen intensively Air flow to the windows Air flow to head Air flow in the footwell Recirculated air mode with air quality sensor Rear window heater lI MIE The buttons control dial IN Setting of the temperature for the left side operation of the seat heating of the left front seat Automatic mode Switching off Climatronic Setting the blower speed s Button for direct switching on off of auxiliary heating 2 Fig 91 on page 88 Switching on off of the temperature setting in dual mode Switching the cooling system on and off AC Setting of the temperature for the right side operation of the seat heating of the right front seat 5 gt o gt _ A WIN Heating and air conditioning system 85 Note Below the top row of buttons is located the interior temperature sensor Do not stick anything on or cover the sensor otherwise it could have an unfavourable ef fect on the Climatronic Automatic mode The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car Switching on gt Set a temperature between 18 C and 26 C gt Move the air outle
184. ent a Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety offered by the brake assist systems must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise risk of an accident The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault Visit a SKODA specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the dam age is and the limitation it is placing on the braking efficiency CAUTION a Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads page 139 a Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not neces sary This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear a All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufactur er to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly 94 Using the system Note a f the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system con siders the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic the brake light flashes automatically After the speed was reduced below around 10 km h or the vehicle was stopped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatical ly after accelerating or driving off again a Before negotiating a steep downhill s
185. er temperature than the outside temperature can be reached 86 Using the system Setting temperature The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately gt The temperature for both sides can be set with the control dial 7 Fig 90 on page 85 after switching on the ignition gt If you wish to set the temperature for the right side turn the control dial Fig 90 on page 85 The warning light in the button Fig 90 on page 85 lights up this indicates that differing temperatures for the left and right side can be set If the warning light in the button 12 Fig 90 on page 85 is illuminated the temperature for both sides cannot be set with the control dial 7 Fig 90 on page 85 You can reactivate this function by pressing the button 12 The warning light in the button goes out The interior temperature can be set between 18 C and 26 C The interior tem perature is regulated automatically within this range If a temperature lower than 18 C is selected a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale If a temperature higher than 26 C is selected a red symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity respectively The temperature is not controlled in this case Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in
186. erly sealed Never drive if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed only if the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed a Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled if additional loudspeakers or other equipment parts are installed in the inner door pan els a Always have work completed by a KODA Service Partner or a competent SKODA specialist garage Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth ing a Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case a Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by SKODA In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non ap proved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired without delay by your SKODA specialist garage The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage cracks or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the mod ules 132 Safety Head airbags J Fig 119 Location of t
187. es must be no older than 4 years Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher SA For the sake of the environment Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling prop erties a shorter braking distance less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 C The fuel consumption is also lower Snow chains First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 176 General Maintenance Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels When driving on wintry roads snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance For technical reasons it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel tyre combinations Wheel size Depth D Tyre size 6J x 15 47 mm 195 65 6 5J x 15 50 mm 195 65 6J x 167 50 mm 205 55 6J x 17 45 mm 205 50 a Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 15 mm b Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains CAUTION The c
188. es storage box page 73 Storage compartments in the doors Stowage compartment below front passenger seat page 73 page 74 Front armrest with storage compartment page 74 Rear armrest with storage compartment page 75 Stowage compartment in rear centre console Seat backrest with through loading channel page 75 page 75 Removable through loading bag page 76 Side compartment in the luggage compartment page 77 Stowage compartment behind the rear seats Estate Car page 77 E warnine Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down when driving when accelerating or cornering and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic risk of accident a When driving ensure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes operate the clutch or accelerator risk of accident a Fig 69 Storage compartment Using cooling system gt Use the rotary switch Fig 69 to open close the air supply Fig 68 Dash panel Storage compart ment on the front passenger side Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or inte rior air to flow into the storage compartment Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the stor
189. ever upwards into position 1 Fig 35 gt Set the desired break between the individual wiper strokes with the switch A Slow wipe gt Position the lever upwards into position 2 Fig 35 Fast wipe gt Position the lever upwards into position 3 Fig 35 Automatic wipe wash for windscreen gt Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into the spring tensioned position 5 Fig 35 the washer system is activated immediately while the windscreen wipers Start wiping a little later The wash system and the windscreen wiper op erate simultaneously at a speed of more than 120 km h gt Release the lever The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper continues for another 3 4 wiper strokes depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen At a speed of more than 2 km h the wiper wipes once again 5 sec onds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the wind screen This feature can be activated deactivated by a SKODA specialist garage Rain sensor gt Place the lever in position 1 Fig 35 Lights and visibility 49 gt The sensitivity of the sensor can be set individually with the switch A Wiping the rear window pane gt Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position 6 Fig 35 and the windscreen wiper will operate every 6 seconds Automatic wipe wash for the rear window gt Press the lever completely away from the steering wheel into the spring ten sion
190. evs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible Even in the event of an emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Unleaded petrol with higher octane number Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the en gine can be used without limitations 1 Valid for Octavia Combi 4x4 and Octavia Scout 156 General Maintenance On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95 91 RON the use of petrol witha higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power in crease or a lower fuel consumption On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min 95 RON the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel consumption Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol 98 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance In case of necessity you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating91 RON of unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available The journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a minimum engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible Even in the event of a
191. f no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 The freeze protection at this concentration is sufficient only to 5 C CAUTION a Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windscreen washer fluid a f the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system only cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be added to the windscreen washer fluid 1 In some countries 5 5 Itr applies for both variants i Note Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when replen ishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be contamina ted which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Battery cover 167 Checking the battery electrolyte level 167 Operation in winter 167 Charging a vehicle battery 168 Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery 168 Replacing the vehicle battery 168 Automatic load deactivation 169 Warning symbols on the vehicle battery Symbol Always wear eye protection Battery acid is severely caustic Always wear gloves and eye protec tion Keep fire sparks open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the ve hicle battery When charging the vehicle battery a highly explosive gas
192. g Diving economically 140 Gearshift lever 97 Side airbag 131 Sliding tilting roof see Electric sliding tilting roof 37 Snow chains 176 Spare wheel 173 Speedometer 9 START STOP Function 100 Starting and stopping the engine 91 Starting engine Jump starting 185 START STOP Jump starting 186 Steering active support 95 Steering force assistance 92 Steering wheel 92 Storage 70 Storage compartment Lighting 46 Storage compartments 70 212 Index Sun visors 47 Switching lights on and off 40 T Taking care of the vehicle Artificial leather 153 Material coverings 153 Materials 153 Natural leather 153 Seat belts 154 Taking care of your vehicle 148 Automatic car wash system 149 Chrome parts 150 Cleaning the wheels 152 Door lock cylinders 151 Headlight lenses 151 High pressure cleaner 149 Plastic parts 150 Polishing the paintwork 150 Preservation 150 Rubber seals 151 Washing 149 Washing by hand 149 Wash system 149 TCS 96 Warning light 21 Technical data 197 Telephone 109 112 Through loading channel 75 Tilting roof see Electric sliding tilting roof 37 Tiptronic 102 see automatic gearbox 104 Tool 179 TOP TETHER 137 Towing 186 Towing a trailer 145 Towing eye 187 Towing protection monitoring 32 Traction control system TCS 96 Trailer Towing a trailer Transport Boot Roof rack system Transporting
193. g 165 Octavia RS and remove the cap gt Insert the wire clamp page 179 Vehicle tool kit into the opening 2 Octavia Scout above the fog light and remove the cap gt Unscrew the screws with a screwdriver Fig 166 A gt Remove the front fog lamp Changing light bulbs and installing fog lights gt Press the locking button 1 Fig 166 of the plug A and remove the plug from the socket B gt Turn the socket B with the bulb counter clockwise up to the stop and remove Fuses and light bulbs 195 Tail lamp assembly Tail light Combi Fig 168 Boot Cover of the lamp holder removing the lamp holder First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 Replacing the light bulbs in the lamp holder gt Unlock the cover of the lamp holder open Fig 168 A gt Press the catches in the direction of the arrow and remove the lamp hold er Fig 168 B gt Push in the bulb into the socket turn counter clockwise up to the stop and re move gt Insert a new bulb into the socket and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop gt Replace the lamp holder so that the catches engage in the housing of the tail light gt Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder Change the light bulb for the parking light gt Unlock the cover of the lamp holder open Fig 168 A gt Remove the faulty light bulb arrow 1 or 2
194. g damage to gearbox or points out general risks of an accident SA For the sake of the environment An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects This is where you will for example find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump tion i Note A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the operation of your vehicle You have opted for a SKODA our sincere thanks for your confidence in us You have received a vehicle with the latest technology and range of amenities Please read this Owner s Manual carefully because the operation in accordance with these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle If you have any questions about your vehicle please contact a SKODA Service Partner We wish you much pleasure with your SKODA and pleasant motoring at all times Your KODA AUTO a s hereinafter referred to as KODA The on board literature The on board literature for your vehicle consists of this Owner s Manual as well as a Service schedule and the Help on the road brochure Depending on the vehicle model and equipment other additional operating man uals and instructions may be provided e g an operating manual for the radio If one of the publications listed above is missing please contact a SKODA Service Partner The Owner s Manual These operating instructions describe all possible equipment variants without identifying them as
195. g system Steering wheel gt With horn gt With driver s front airbag gt with pushbuttons for radio navigation system and mobile phone Instrument cluster Instruments and warning lights Lever for the multifunction switch gt Multifunction display gt Windscreen wiper and wash system Regulator for front left seat heating Air outlet vents Switch for hazard warning lights Storage compartment on the dash panel Depending on equipment fitted gt Radio gt Navigation system Regulator for front right seat heating Storage compartment on the front passenger side Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag in front passenger storage compartment Front passenger airbag Fuse box on side of dash panel Light switch 130 108 118 8 133 130 190 l NINININI S e e Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the head light beam range adjustment Bonnet release lever Storage compartment on the driver s side Lever for adjusting the steering wheel Ignition lock Depending on equipment fitted gt Operating controls for the heating gt Operating controls for the air conditioning system gt Operating controls for Climatronic TCS switch Front and rear parking aid Depending on equipment fitted gt Gearshift lever manual gearbox gt Selector lever automatic gearbox
196. g which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to carry them out is called a dialogue The system gives audible feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors gt Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses gt Avoid a bad pronunciation gt Close the doors windows and sliding roof to reduce or stop disturbing exterior noise gt It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that the tone of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise gt During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle e g passengers talking at the same time gt Do not speak if the system makes an announcement The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and direc ted to the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front passen ger can operate the equipment Entering a phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually spo ken digits the whole number at once or in the form of digital blocks separated by short pauses After each order of digits separation through brief voice pause all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system D Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system T16 Using the system The digits O 9 symbols gt are permitted The system detects no cont
197. ge page 168 On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator the so called magic eye Fig 139 the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check gt Black colour electrolyte level is correct gt Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced it Note The battery electrolyte level is periodically checked by a KODA Service Partner as part of the Inspection Service a For technical reasons on vehicles with the description AGM the electrolyte level cannot be checked a Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engine start Operation in winter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 165 At low temperatures the vehicle battery only has part of the initial power output that it has at normal temperatures A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and if necessary re charged by a SKODA Service Partner before the start of the winter Inspecting and replenishing 167 Charging a vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H o
198. ge 45 Interior lighting version 1 a 46 Using the system EJ warninec FF Note If the entry light is on do not touch its cover risk of burns m a lf the on board voltage drops the rear window heater switches off automatical ly in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine con trol page 169 Automatic load deactivation Bootlight a The position and shape of the switch may vary according to the model ia The light comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened If the lid remains open for more than about 10 minutes the boot light switches off automatically Fig 32 Switch for rear window heater Fig 33 Sun visor double sun visor The sun visor for the driver or front passenger can be pulled out of the fixture and swivelled towards the door in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 33 The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers Push the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 gt The rear window heater is switched on or off by pressing the switch Fig 32 the warning light in the switch comes on or goes out On vehicles that are equipped with a double sun visor the auxiliary visor can be unfolded in the direction of the arrow 3 after swivelling the sun visor towards The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running the door The rear window heater switches off automatically after 10 minutes FJ warnine The sun visors must not be swivelled
199. gearbox 105 Emergency programme First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 102 An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are functional faults in the gearbox electronics All of the display elements illuminate or go out A functional fault can have the following effect gt The gearbox only shifts into certain gears gt The reverse gear R cannot be used gt The manual shift programme is switched off in emergency mode i Note If the gearbox has switched to emergency mode drive to a KODA specialist ga rage to have the fault rectified Selector lever emergency unlocking Fig 104 Selector lever emergency un locking e z 0370 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 102 In case of interruption of the power supply e g flat vehicle battery defective fuse or defect of the selector lever lock the selector lever can no longer be shif ted from the position P in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved The selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Open the storage compartment in front centre console or the front ashtray 106 Using the system gt Carefully pull up the front left and right cover gt Pull up rear cover gt Use a finger to press the yellow plast
200. gine compartment Note a The arrangement of the warning lights depends on the model version The sym bols shown in the following functional description are to be found as warning lights in the instrument cluster Handbrake The warning light comes on if the handbrake is applied An audible warning is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km h The following is displayed in the information display Release parking brake Brake system The warning light illuminates if the brake fluid level is too low or there is a fault in the ABS The following is displayed in the information display Brake fluid Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the brake flu id page 164 H FI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level page 158 Engine compartment a If the warning light is displayed simultaneously with warning light page 22 Antilock brake system ABS do not continue your jour ney Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle s braking distance Seat belt warning light 4 The warning light 4 co
201. gine is at operating temperature gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient gt The stationary vehicle is not on a steep slope or a steep downhill section gt The engine speed is less than 1 200 rpm gt The temperature inside the vehicle battery is not too low or too high gt There is sufficient pressure in the braking system gt The difference between the outdoor and the set temperature in the interior is not too great gt The vehicle speed since the last time the engine was switched off was greater than 3 km h gt No cleaning of the diesel particle filter takes place page 23 gt The front wheels are not turned excessively the steering angle is less than 3 4 of a steering wheel revolution Conditions for an automatic restart start phase gt The clutch pedal is depressed gt The max min temperature is set gt The defrost function for the windscreen is switched on gt A high blower stage has been selected gt The START STOP button is pressed Conditions for an automatic restart without driver intervention gt The vehicle moves at a speed of more than 3 km h gt The difference between the outdoor and the set temperature in the interior is too great gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is not sufficient gt There is insufficient pressure in the braking system If the driver s seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver s door is opened during stop
202. gt Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 135 Transporting children safely gt Adopt the correct seated position page 122 Correct seated position Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position gt Correctly fasten the seat belt Also inform passengers to fasten the seat belt correctly page 125 Seat belts Passive Safety 121 What influences the driving safety First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your driving safety is effected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk The following guidelines must therefore be observed gt Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your passengers or mobile phone calls gt Never drive when your driving ability is impaired e g through medication alco hol drugs gt Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit gt Always adjust the driving speed to the road traffic and weather conditions gt Take regular breaks on long journeys at least every two hours CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Correct seated position for the driver 123 Correct seated position for the front passenger 123 Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats 123 Examples of an incorrect seated
203. h Middle rear head restraint 58 the other hand Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same Removing and installing a head restraint level as the upper part of your head gt Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop for the rear head restraints fold the seat backrest forward gt Press the locking button in direction of the arrow Fig 44 B and pull the head restraint out The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant Cor gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest rectly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protec until the locking button clicks into place a tion for the occupants page 122 Correct seated position The position of the front and rear outer head restraints is adjustable in height The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions E WARNING a The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident a Never drive with the head restraints removed risk of injury a f the rear seats are occupied the rear head restraint must not be in the lower position m Fig 45 Rear seats middle head re straint First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 58 Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system Removi
204. h a towing device or is fitted with a towing device from SKODA Original Accessories then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer On vehicles with a towing device the ball rod is detachable and is stowed togeth er with separate operating instructions in the spare wheel well or in the compart ment for the spare wheel within the boot page 179 Vehicle tool kit Your vehicle is fitted with a 13 pin power socket for the electrical connection be tween the vehicle and trailer If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7 pin connec tor you can use a suitable adapter from SKODA Original Accessories If a towing device is retrofitted it must be completed in accordance with the manufacturer s specifications i Note If you have any questions please contact a SKODA Service Partner Loading a trailer Loading a trailer The vehicle trailer combination must be balanced whereby the maximum permis sible drawbar load must be utilised If the drawbar load is too low it jeopardises the performance of the vehicle trailer combination Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible Secure the items from slipping The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trail er is laden Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination Tyre p
205. h the ignition on within 15 seconds after unlocking the door in order to deactivate the anti theft alarm system The alarm is trig gered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds Locking the vehicle with the key gt Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the opposite direction of travel lock position B Fig 11 on page 28 gt The doors the boot lid and the fuel filler flap are locked gt The switched on interior lights will switch off over the door contact gt The windows and the electric sliding tilting roof close while the key is held in the lock position gt The safe securing system is immediately activated gt The warning light in the driver door begins flashing i Note If the driver s door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked Vehicle locking unlocking from the inside Fig 12 Centre console Central locking button If the vehicle was not locked from the outside you can also unlock and lock it with the rocker switch Fig 12 without the ignition switched on Locking all doors and the boot lid gt Press the button in the area 4 Fig 12 The symbol in the button comes on Unlocking all doors and the boot lid gt Press the button in the area 4 Fig 12 The symbol 4 in the button is no longer illuminated The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button gt It is not possible to open the doors or the boot
206. hains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed Introductory information If you want to retrofit the vehicle with accessories if a vehicle part is to be re placed with a new one or when needing to make technical changes the follow ing instructions must be observed gt Always seek advice from a SKODA Service Partner before purchasing any acces sories or parts and before making any technical changes H gt The guidelines and instructions issued by SKODA must be observed when mak ing technical changes Adhering to the prescribed procedures will prevent any kind of damage to the ve hicle and its travelling and operating safety will be maintained The vehicle also complies with German road transport regulations StVZO More information is available from a SKODA Service Partner who can also perform the necessary work correctly Vehicles with special built on types Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to hand over later to the old car user This ensures the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to opera tional faults This interference can also impair not directly affected systems be cause of the networking of the electronic components In other words the
207. hat are designed to be used with snow chains is identical to the tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 225 45 R17 The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres If the load varies greatly adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced There are a wide range of influences when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt through vibration in the steering Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres Wheel alignment errors Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear and tear on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety In the event of any unusual tyre wear seek assistance from a SKODA specialist garage Tyre damage Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and where possible at a right angle in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage punctures cuts splits and bulges etc on a regular basis Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile Unusual vibrations
208. he battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the dis charged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and in sulated terminal clamps Observe the manufacturer s instructions Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases is red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases is black EJ warnine a A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 C In case of frozen battery carry out no jump starting risk of explosion a Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment page 158 Engine compartment The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact with each other In addition the jump start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conduct ing parts of the vehicle risk of short circuit Do not clamp the jump start cable to the negative terminal of the dis charged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started a Route the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment Do not bend over the battery risk of caustic burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly Keep any s
209. he connector with the bulb in counter clockwise up to the stop and re move gt Replace the lamp insert the connector with the new bulb and turn clockwise up to the stop gt To re install the fog light first of all place the fog light with the lug on the side opposite the licence plate gt Press in the fog lamp on the side closest to the licence plate gt In order to reinstall the cap first of all insert it starting on the side facing the marking Then press the cap on the side closest to the fog light The cap must engage firmly gt Replace the bulb insert the socket with the new bulb and turn clockwise up to the stop gt Insert the plug A into the socket B gt Retighten the screws and insert the cap The cap must engage firmly Fig 167 Remove the licence plate light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 gt Open the luggage compartment door and unscrew the glass cover Fig 167 gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one gt Replace the glass cover and push in until the stop Make sure that you install the rubber seal in the right direction gt Slightly screw the glass cover Fig 166 Front bumper Fog lights fog lights Replacing the light bulb First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 Removing the cap and fog light gt Insert a finger into the opening 1 Fi
210. he coolant by combusting fuel from the vehicle tank The coolant warms up the air which if the blower speed is not set to zero flows into the passenger compartment Auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by switching off the engine whereby the interior temperature is effectively de creased e g with the vehicle parked in the sun E WARNING a The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms risk of poi soning The auxiliary heating must not be running during refuelling risk of fire The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of the vehicle Therefore if you wish to operate the auxiliary heating do not park the vehicle in such a way that the exhaust gases from the auxiliary heating can come into contact with highly flammable materials e g dry grass or easily in flammable substances e g spilt fuel a i Note a f the auxiliary heating runs the fuel consumption comes from the vehicle tank The auxiliary heating automatically controls the filling level in the fuel tank If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank the function of the auxiliary heating is blocked a The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating which is located on the underside of the vehicle must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked a f the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running the vehicle battery discha
211. he driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle CAUTION Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display e g when cleaning to prevent any possible damage Main menu Fig 7 Information display Control elements on the windscreen wiper lever control elements on the multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 15 Operating with the buttons on the windscreen wiper lever gt Activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch A Fig 7 for longer gt Individual menu items can be selected by means of the rocker switch A When the pushbutton B is briefly pressed the information you have selected is dis played Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel gt Activate the Main menu by pressing and holding the button C Fig 7 fora short while gt By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher gt The individual menus can be selected by pressing the adjustment wheel D The selected menu is displayed after briefly pressing the adjustment wheel D The following information can be selected depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle MFD page 12 Audio Operating instructions for the radio Navigation Operating instructions for the navigation system Instruments and warning lights 15 Phone page 107 Aux Heating page 87
212. he engine CAUTION a Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the stand ard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and exhaust sys tem a If you park the car for a lengthy period fill with petrol complying with DIN EN 228 because Ethanol E85 can contain low quantities of impurities which can lead to corrosion SA For the sake of the environment a If you use Ethanol E85 the CO emission of your vehicle is lowered up to 5 a The use of engine preheating at temperatures below 10 C has a positive effect on the fuel consumption and thus on the environment i Note a When operating with Ethanol E85 the fuel consumption increases by approx 33 as a lower quantity of energy is contained in the bioethanol than in unleaded petrol a Biofuel Ethanol E85 contains only a low quantity of additives in contrast to un leaded petrol Therefore we recommend to fill up the tank with unleaded petrol complying with EN 228 every 15 000 km e g before the oil change and run it empty so that the engine remains clean a The interval of 15 OOO km applies for the oil change a An extension cable used for connecting to the electrical network is located in the luggage compartment Inspecting and replenishing 157 Diesel fuel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 155 Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with the
213. he head airbag gas filled head airbag In the event of a severe side collision the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car Fig 119 A In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the rele vant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the acci dent occurs When deployed the airbags cover the entire side window and door pillar Fig 119 IB Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car is cushioned by the inflated head airbag The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area The head airbag also offers additional protec tion in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar EI wARNING There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly a Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of cloth ing Additionally clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items of cloth ing BE WARNING Continued a The airbag control unit operates with sensors located in the front doors
214. he oil level page 161 gt Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully Inspecting and replenishing 161 Changing engine oil First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or according to the service interval indicator page 10 Service Interval Display CAUTION Additives must not be added to the engine oil risk of causing considerable dam age to parts of the engine Damage which results from such product are exclu ded from the warranty Note If your skin has come into contact with oil it must be washed thoroughly Coolant First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The cooling system is filled with a coolant in the factory The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive of 40 This mixture provides antifreeze protection down to 25 C and also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion It also prevents the formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant The concentration of coolant must therefore not be reduced by adding water dur ing the summer months or in countries with a warm climate The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least 40 40 If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons
215. he range The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner If the memory is set to zero after disconnecting the battery the fuel consump tion of 10 Itr 100 km is calculated for the range afterwards the value is adapted accordingly to the style of driving Distance travelled The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the dis play page 12 If you wish to measure the distance travelled from a particular point in time you need to set the memory to zero at this point in time by pressing the button Fig 6 on page 13 or D The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1999 km or 9 999 km on vehicles with an information display The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded 1 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litres if the vehicle is sta tionary 2 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre 14 Using the system Average speed The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in km hour page 12 If you wish to determine the average speed over a certain pe riod of time you need to set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button B Fig 6 on page 13 or D After erasing the memory no value appears in the display until you have driven approx 300 m The display is updated regularly while you are driving Current speed The current sp
216. he trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Total trip memory memory 2 The total trip memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1999 kilometres driven and on vehi cles which are fitted with an information display up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving or 9 999 kilometres driven The memory is deleted when ei ther of these limits is reached and the calculation starts all over again Unlike the single trip memory the total trip memory is not deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours i Note All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is dis connected Operation Fig 6 Multifunction display Control elements on the windscreen wiper lev er control elements on the multifunction steering wheel First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings fj on page 12 The rocker switch A Fig 6 and the button B are located on the windscreen wiper lever Switching over and resetting is performed with the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel Select memory gt Press the button B Fig 6 or D Selecting functions using the windscreen wiper lever gt Briefly press the rocker switch A Fig 6 up or down This opens the individual functions
217. he vehicle within 30 seconds After closing the door it no longer be opened from the outside The door can be unlocked from the inside by pulling on the door handle again and then opened The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again fam tae autside S automatically the next time the car is locked 32 Using the system CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Open close BBB Automatic locking 33 Emergency unlocking 34 E warnine a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid Other wise the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock was closed risk of accident a Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid it could crack risk of injury i Note a After closing the boot lid it is automatically locked within 1 second and the anti theft alarm system is activated This applies only if the vehicle was locked before closing the boot lid a The function of the handle above the licence plate is deactivated when starting off or at a speed of 5 km hour or more for vehicles with central locking The func tion of the handle is activated again when the vehicle has stopped and a door is opened Open close Fig 16 Handle of boot lid First read an
218. he windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte rior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to al low the heated air to escape The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window iS open If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system fresh air mode should be selected SA For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also reduced when fuel is saved Operational problems If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be gt One of the fuses has blown Check the fuse and replace if necessa ry page 190 gt The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 9 If you cannot rectify the functional fault yourself or the cooling capacity decrea ses the cooling system must be switched off Visit a SKODA specialist garage Heating and air conditioning system 79 Peete eee oo Changing the air flow direction Air outlet gt Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to age the direc tion of the air flow using the vertically arranged thumbwheel Fig 86 gt Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left in order to change the air flow E the See eee pa The thumbweels are located on the air outlet ve
219. hift lever into Neutral or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox move the selec tor lever into position P a Firmly apply the handbrake a Allow the engine to cool For safety reasons the bonnet must always be properly closed when driving This is why after closing the bonnet the lock must always be checked to en sure it has engaged properly HE WARNING Continued a f you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving stop the ve hicle immediately and close the bonnet risk of an accident Keep children clear of the engine compartment Do not touch any hot engine parts risk of burns Never spill fluids on the hot engine Such fluids e g the antifreeze con tained in the coolant may ignite a Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the vehicle s battery a Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the en gine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir cover it with a cloth to protect your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot cool ant Do not leave any items such as cloths or tools in the engine compartment If you wish to work under the vehicle you must secure the vehicle from roll ing away and support it with suitable supporting blocks the car jack is not suffic
220. hing off gt Turn the light switch to the position O or 20 If the light switch is in the position AUTO the symbol illuminates when the ignition is switched on AUTO next to the light switch If the low beam is activated with the light sensor the symbol illuminates additionally next to the light switch If the light comes on automatically the side lights and low beam as well as li cence plate light light up at the same time If the automatic driving lamp control is switched on the light is regulated with the light sensor in the rear mirror holder If the light intensity drops below the set value e g when driving during the day into a tunnel the low beam and the side lights as well as the licence plate light come on automatically If the light intensity increases again the lights switch off automatically Rain lights If the windscreen wiper is switched on in rain sensor mode for longer than 10 sec onds or in permanent wipe mode position 2 or 3 page 49 Activating the windscreen wipers and washers for longer than 15 seconds the side lights and low beam are switched on automatically The light switches off if the windscreen wipe is in operation rain sensor for more than around 4 minutes or is not switch ed on in the operation permanent wipe Note Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor so that its functionality is not impaired or disabled Cornering lights First read and observe the introductory i
221. htening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt To re insert the cap after removing the towing eye first insert it with the upper area afterwards press the lower area too The cap must engage firmly CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fuses in the dash panel 190 Fuses in the engine compartment 191 Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses gt Before replacing a fuse switch off the ignition and the appropriate consumer gt Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat ing page 190 Fuses in the dash panel or page 191 Fuses in the engine compartment gt Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the cover of the fuse box place it on the relevant fuse and pull it out gt A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage Colour coding of fuses Colour Maximum amperage light brown dark brown red blue yellow white green orange F warnine Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the en gine compartment page 158 Engine compartment C
222. ic part in the direction of the ar row Fig 104 gt Simultaneously press the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and shift the lever into the position N if the selector lever is shifted back into the position P it is blocked again f a mobile phone or a two way radio system is operated in a vehicle without an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incorrectly Mobile phones and two way radio systems this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the vehicle Two way radio systems mobile phones or mounts must not be installed on SKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two way radio systems with airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of Never leave a mobile phone on a seat on the dash panel or in another area up to 10 watts from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre an accident or a collision risk of injury a In the event of air transport the Bluetooth function for the hands free sys tem must be switched off by a specialist garage Please refer to a SKODA Service Partner for information about the possibilities of installing and operating mobile phones and two way radio systems that have a transmission power of more than 10 W Operating mobile phones or two way radio systems may interfere with the func i Not tionality of
223. ice interval display page 10 With digital clock page 11 With multifunction display page 12 With information display page 15 Knob for the selection of the mode turn knob the setting press knob gt Setting the hours minutes gt Activating deactivating the second speed in mph or km h gt Service intervals Display of the number of days and kilometres remaining until the next Inspection Service gt Reset trip counter for the distance driven gt Resetting Service Interval Display gt Activate deactivate display mode Fuel gauge page 9 vvv v v Engine revolutions counter First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The red scale of the rev counter 1 Fig 2 on page 8 indicates the range in which the engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed The engine control unit restricts the engine speed to a steady limit You should shift into the next higher gear before the red scale of the revolution counter is reached or move the selector lever into position D if your car is fitted with an automatic gearbox To maintain the optimum motor speed observe the gearshift indica tor page 11 SA For the sake of the environment Shifting to a higher gear in good time helps to lower fuel consumption minimises operating noise levels protects the environment and contributes to a longer life and reliability of the engine Speedometer First read and
224. icle by contacting a Afterwards urban driving is simulated KODA Service Partner In the extra urban driving cycle the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all Depending on the range of equipment style of driving traffic situation weather gears corresponding to daily routine driving conditions The driving speed varies influences and vehicle condition consumption values may deviate from the indi between 0 and 120 km h cated values The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 for the intra urban cycle and 63 for the extra urban cycle E WARNING Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights risk of accident and damage Dimensions Dimensions mm OCTAVIA OCTAVIA OCTAVIARS ESTATE ESTATE ESTATE RS COMBI 4x4 GreenLine GreenLine 4569 4569 Length 45973 4569 4597 4584 4569 4599 4569 4584 1769 Width 1769 1769 1769 1784 1769 1769 1769 1784 Width including exterior mirror 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018 1462 1468 14859 1462 1490 1468 1495 Berga 14499 1449 a 1455 1455 ii 1520 laa 14843 1507 140 140 1649 140 164 140 138 Clearance 1250 1250 127 1250 1250 128 1630 179 179 198 Technical data OCTAVIA GreenLine 2578 OCTAVIA Wheel base 2578 OCTAVIA RS 2578 ESTATE 2578 ESTATE GreenLine 2578 ESTATE RS 2578 COMBI 4x4 2578 2578 Track gauge front rear 1541 1514
225. id damaging the heating elements for the seat heaters a Do not use the seat heaters if the seats are not occupied by persons or if ob jects such as a child seat bag etc are fastened or stored on them A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur a Do not clean the seats using moisture page 153 Fabric covers on electrically heated seats The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity a f the on board voltage drops the seat heating is switched off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control page 169 Automatic load deactivation a f the heaters for the rear seats are set to the highest intensity level 3 they are automatically switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes two warning lights are illuminated on the switch Seats and Stowage 5 7 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 58 Adjusting the height of a head restraint gt Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as This chapter contains information on the following subjects required Fig 44 A E j l l l l ro gt To move the head restraint downwards press and hold the safety but Adjusting removing and installing a head restraint 58 ton Fig 44 B with one hand and press the head restraint downwards wit
226. ient for this risk of injury If any inspection work has to be carried out when the engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts e g V belt alternator radiator fan and the high voltage ignition system The following must also be ob served Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system a Always make sure that no jewellery loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts hazard Always remove any jewellery tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any work Additionally the following warning instructions must be observed if work has to be carried out on the fuel or electrical system a Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system Do not smoke a Never work near open flames a Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby CAUTION a Always top up using the correct specification of fluids This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage a Never open the bonnet using the locking lever danger of causing damage SA For the sake of the environment In view of the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids the specials tools and knowledge required for such work we recommend that fluids are changed by a Skoda Service Partner as part of the inspection service Note If you have any questions regarding the fluids visit a KODA Service Partner a Fluids with the correct specifications can be
227. ig 152 on page 183 of the air compressor firmly onto the tyre valve gt Check that the air release valve 7 is closed gt Start the engine and run it in idle gt Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket page 69 gt Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 gt Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved Maximum run time of 8 minutes gt Switch off the air compressor gt If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve gt Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre gt Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process gt If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit E gt Switch off the air compressor gt Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved continue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes page 185 FI WARNING a During inflation the tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot risk of injury Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flammable materials
228. ight lenses Rubber seals First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 The rubber seals on doors the sliding roof and other windows remain smoother and last longer if the seals are treated regularly with a suitable rubber care prod uct This helps to prevent leakages and premature wear of the seals Rubber seals which are well cared for also do not stick together in cold winter weather Door lock cylinders First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 Specific products must be used for de icing door lock cylinders Note a When washing your vehicle ensure as little water as possible gets into the lock ing cylinders a We recommend that suitable materials from KODA Original Accessories are used for maintaining the door lock cylinders Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 151 Wheels First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular ba sis Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion from the wheel rims otherwise the material will be affected Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims
229. illu minated gt The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket gt The speed is higher than approx 60 km h gt Trailers must have a fixed drawbar gt The ESC works for both braked and unbraked trailers Trailer is connected to the anti theft alarm system gt If the vehicle is factory fitted with an anti theft alarm system and a towing de vice gt If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trail er socket gt If the electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is fully functional gt If the vehicle is locked with the car key and the anti theft alarm system is acti vated When the vehicle is locked the alarm is activated as soon as the electrical con nection to the trailer is interrupted Always deactivate the anti theft alarm system before a trailer is connected dis connected Otherwise the anti theft alarm system could accidentally be trig gered page 31 Anti theft alarm system 146 Driving Tips Engine overheating If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right hand area or the red area of the scale the speed must be reduced immediately Stop and switch off the engine if the warning light in the instrument cluster starts to flash Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle page 163 Checking the coolant level The following guidelines must be observed
230. in continuous mode no break between each wiping process 50 Using the system Activation deactivation The function of the automatic rear window wiper is activated deactivated in the information display in the menu Settings Lights amp Vision Rear wiper Headlight cleaning system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed for the first time and fifth time the low beam or main beam are switched on and the windscreen wiper lever was held in the position 5 Fig 35 on page 49 for about 1 second The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the water pressure for cleaning the headlights You should remove stubborn dirt such as insect residues from the headlight len ses at regular intervals for example when refuelling The following guidelines must be observed page 151 Headlight lenses To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter any snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de icing spray CAUTION Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand risk of damage Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig 36 Windscreen wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 When in the rest position the wiper arms cannot b
231. in g km Type plate The type plate Fig 170 is located on the lower part of the column between the front and rear doors on the driver s side The type plate lists the following weights Maximum permissible gross weight 9 Maximum permissible towed weight towing vehicle and trailer Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Operating weight The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only This value repre sents the minimum operating weight without additional weight increasing equip ment such as air conditioning system spare wheel or trailer hitch The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver 75 kg the weight of the operating fluids the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 capacity It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the operating weight H The payload consists of the following components gt Passengers gt All items of luggage and other loads gt Roof load including roof rack system gt Equipment not included in the operating weight gt Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer max 80 kg Technical data 197 Measuring the fuel consumption and CO emissions according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines Note The measurement of the intra urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine a f required you can find out the precise weight of your veh
232. in the telephone mount en sures optimum sending and receiving power Inserting the mobile phone and adapter Fig 106 Universal telephone preinstalla tion Only one telephone mount is factory fitted An adapter for the mobile phone can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories Inserting the adapter and mobile phone gt First of all push the adapter A in the direction of the arrow Fig 106 up to the stop into the mount Then press the adapter slightly downwards until it locks securely into position gt Insert the mobile phone into the adapter A as specified in the instructions from the manufacturer of the adapter Removing the adapter and mobile phone gt Simultaneously press the locks on the mount Fig 106 and remove the adapter with the mobile phone CAUTION Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interrup tion of the connection When removing the mobile phone the connection to the factory fitted antenna is interrupted which reduces the quality of the transmit ting and receiving signal The charging of the mobile phone battery is also inter rupted Managing telephone calls with the help of the adapter Fig 107 Principle sketch single button adapter two button adapter Function overview of the amp Fig 107 PTT push to talk button on the adapt er gt Switch on off voice control gt Accept end a call On some adapters include the button
233. ind the vehicle Such ob Stacles may not be recognised by the parking aid sensors a Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain objects and types of cloth ing cannot reflect the signals from the parking aid Thus these objects or peo ple who wear such clothing are not recognised by the parking aid sensors a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the parking aid Under unfavourable conditions objects or people may not be recognised a If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car this indicates a system fault The fault is confirmed additionally when the symbol Pu flashes in the button Pa Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage a The sensors must be kept clean free of ice etc to enable the parking aid to operate properly a f the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in the position P the warning signal is interrupted the vehicle cannot move CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Storingaspeed __ SYS Changing a stored speed 99 Switching off the cruise control system temporarily 100 Switching off the cruise control system completely __ C C CSCSCSSSSS CO The cruise control system CCS maintains a constant speed more than 30 km h 20 mph once it has been set without you having to depress the accelerator pedal Thi
234. indscreen Parking ticket hold er Install gt Move the housing into the locking mechanism as far as it will go gt Restore the foldable luggage compartment cover Seats and Stowage 77 The note holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets EI warnine The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s vision 78 Using the system Introductory information The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The well being of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity The system prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling ef fect Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air condi tioning system page 84 or for Climatronic page 86 The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice snow or leaves to en sure that the heating and cooling system operates properly After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is quite normal and not an indicat
235. ing less braking and consequently less accelerating are required If possible let your vehicle coast to a stop or use the engine brake if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red for example Shifting to save energy Fig 125 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km depending on the selected gear 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 BNH 0102 Shifting up early saves on fuel Manual gearbox gt Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear gt Shift up into the next gear at approx 2 000 revolutions An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early Observe the recommended gear page 11 Recommended gear A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption Fig 125 Automatic gearbox gt Slowly apply the accelerator pedal However do not depress it to the kickdown position gt If the accelerator pedal is only depressed slowly on a vehicle fitted with an au tomatic gearbox an economic driving programme is automatically selected Note Observe the recommended gear page 11 Recommended gear Avoiding full throttle V100 km Fig 126 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km and speed in km h kmh 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 BNH 0119 Driving more slowly means saving fuel Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consump tion but also positively influence
236. ing bag ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height a The removable through loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when moist EI WARNING Only place small and light objects up to a total weight of 3 kg into the storage Fig 83 compartment In the event of a vehicle collision heavy objects could be Boot Side compartment thrown out of the compartment risk of injuries For this reason the front part of the luggage compartment cover must always cover over the storage compartment The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar and on the handle of the head gt The compartment is opened by turning the locks in the direction of the ar liner above each of the rear doors row Fig 83 FI warninec The CD changer is housed in this compartment a a Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear Only use the hooks for hanging light items of clothing and ensure that there are no heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this may reduce the effectiveness of head airbags Fig 84 Removing the stowage compart ment CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg Removing gt First of all remove the foldable luggage compartment cover page 64 gt Grab the housing with both hands and remove by pulling in the direction of the arrow Fig 84 Fig 85 W
237. ing the vehicle with the radio remote control switching on the ignition or locking the vehicle If no door is opened the vehicle is locked automatically after 30 seconds a If the COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function is switched on constantly the battery will be heavily discharged particularly over short distances a The illumination period for the COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function can be changed by means of the information display Tourist light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system driving on the left right without dazzling the oncoming vehicles When the mode tourist light is active the side to side swivel of the headlights is deactivated 42 Using the system The mode tourist light is activated deactivated via the information display in the menu Settings Lights amp Vision Travel mode Off Switched on Fog lights Fig 24 Dash panel Light switch First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 Switching on gt First of all turn the light switch to position or 20 Fig 24 gt Pull the light switch to position 1 The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on page 18 Fog lights with the function CORNER First read and observe the introductory information and safety
238. inuous digit combinations such as twenty three but only individually spoken digits two three Activating voice control GSM II gt by briefly pressing the button 4 Fig 107 on page 111 on the adapter gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multi function steering wheel page 108 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel Deactivating voice control GSM II If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently being played will have to be stopped gt by briefly pressing the button on the adapter gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel If the system expects a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by pressing the button on the adapter gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel Activating voice control GSM III The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button 1 on the multi function steering wheel Deactivating voice control GSM Ill If the system is currently playing a message you will need to end the message currently being played by pressing the 1 button on the multifunction steering wheel If the system expects a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself gt with the CANCEL voice command gt by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel E Note a The dialogue of an i
239. ion and safety warn ings J on page 39 When it is dark this function makes it possible to switch on the lights for a short time after leaving the vehicle or when approaching the vehicle Switching on the COMING HOME function gt The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control AUTO gt Switch off the ignition gt The light switches on after the driver s door is opened Switching on the LEAVING HOME function gt After leaving the vehicle the light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control AUTO Lights and visibility 41 gt Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control and the light is switched on Depending on the equipment fitted the COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function switches on the following lights gt Parking lights gt Low beam gt Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors gt Licence plate light The COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the interior rear mirror If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light sensor the light is not switched on after opening the driver s door or unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control Switching off the COMING HOME function The light goes out 10 seconds after closing all of the doors and the boot lid If a door or the boot lid remains open the light goes out after 60 seconds Switching off the LEAVING HOME function The light goes out 10 seconds after unlock
240. ion of a leak EJ warnine a For your own safety and that of other road users ensure that all the win dows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to demist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up i Note a The used air streams out through the vents in the boot a We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the in terior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning sys tem This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is oper ating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense re placement of compressor a To ensure that the heating and air conditioning systems work properly do not block up the air outlet vents with any objects Using the air conditioning system economically The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption It recommended to open t
241. ipstick 161 5 Brake fluid reservoir 164 6 Battery below a cover 165 i Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical Checking the engine oil level Fig 134 Dipstick First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine Fig 134 Checking the oil level gt Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil sump and remove the dipstick gt Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop gt Then pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Oil level within range A gt No oil must be refilled Oil level within range gt Oil can be refilled It is possible that the oil level may then be within range A after doing this Oil level within range gt Oil must be refilled It is sufficient once this is done to keep the oil level within range B It is normal for the engine to consume oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 1 1000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres One should therefor
242. itch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the automatic gearbox into position P gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit page 182 gt Ifa trailer is connected remove it gt Remove the breakdown kit from the boot gt Stick the sticker 2 Fig 152 on page 183 on the dash panel in view of the driv er gt Do not remove the foreign body e g screw or nail from the tyre gt Unscrew the valve cap gt Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it ona clean sur face rag paper etc Sealing and inflating tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 Sealing gt Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 Fig 152 on page 183 several times gt Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clockwise direction The film on the cap is pierced automatically gt Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve gt Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre gt Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve gt Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 184 Do it yourself Inflating gt Screw the tyre inflation hose 5 F
243. itching off the ignition the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on The side lights also go out after the ignition key is removed EJ warnine a Never drive with only the side lights on The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other oncoming traffic Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor The automatic driving lamp control AUTO only operates as a support and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and if necessa ry to switch on the light depending on the light conditions The light sensor cannot for example detect rain or snow Under these conditions we recom mend switching on the low beam or fog lights CAUTION The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with na tional legal requirements The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the lights cis Note a If the light switch is in the position the ignition key is removed and the driv er s door is open an audible warning signal will sound The audible warning signal is switched off by means of the door contact when the driver s door is closed ig nition off however the side lights remain on to illuminate the parked vehicle if necessary a f there is a fault in the light switch the low beam comes on automatically a In the event of cool or hu
244. ith the radio or navigation system Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp edged objects or corrosive and acidic cleaning agents risk of damaging the heating elements or window aerial Do not attach scents and air fresheners to the dashboard risk of damage to the dashboard To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high pressure cleaners or steam jets the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed Do not clean the roof trim with a brush risk of damage to the trim surface SA For the sake of the environment a Used cans of vehicle care products represent a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations a Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose Note a Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe pol ish etc from the material leather panels and textiles as quickly as possible Due to possible issues with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle the special tools and knowledge required we recommend that this is completed by a SKODA Service Partner Washing the vehicle First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 148 The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing and wax treatment How often the vehicle
245. ive grille a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 1 4 must be used for fastening the load Fastening elements Fig 49 Boot Lashing eyes and fastening elements Combi lashing eyes and fastening elements First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 60 The boot provides the following fastening elements Fig 49 A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3 5 KN 350 kg Ko Note The upper front lashing eyes are located underneath the folding rear seat back rest Fig 49 Seats and Stowage 61 Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are provi ded on both sides of the boot Fig 51 Fig 50 CAUTION Boot Folding double hooks The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 5 kg B12 0317 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 60 Folding double hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are provided on one or both sides of the luggage compartment depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle Fig 50 Kg CAUTION Fig 52 Fixing net Horizontal pocket vertical pocket e luggage weighing up to 5 kg can be attached to each side of the dou S First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H
246. k is cancelled when the Shiftlock button is pressed Ignition key withdrawal lock After the ignition is switched off the ignition key can only be withdrawn if the se lector lever is in the position P If the ignition key is withdrawn the selector lever is blocked in position P Kickdown function First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 102 The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration power When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed the kickdown function is activated in the desired driving program This function has precedence over the driving pro gramme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the current selector lever position D S or Tiptronic The gearbox shifts down to one or sev eral gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range Dynamic shift programme First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 102 The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre defined driving programmes Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most economical driving pr
247. l can be reached with your arms at a slight angle gt Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge B of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 125 Seat belts Manual driver seat adjustment page 55 Manually adjusting the front seats Electrical driver seat adjustment page 55 Adjusting front seats electrically Correct seated position for the front passenger First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 122 853 0513 For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed gt Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head B Fig 110 on page 123 gt Correctly fasten the seat belt page 125 In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated page 133 Deactivating airbags Manual front passenger adjustment page 55 Manually adjusting the front seats Electrical front passenger seat adjustment page 55 Adjusting front seats elec trically Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats
248. lable page 29 E This chapter contains information on the following subjects Window open close 35 Window in the front passenger door and the rear doors open close 36 Force limiter of the power windows 36 Window convenience operation 8G Operational faults 37 E WARNING a f the vehicle is locked from the outside do not leave anybody in the vehicle as it is not possible to open the windows from the inside in the event of an emergency Fig 17 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid a The system is fitted with a force limiter page 36 If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centi First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn metres The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully Otherwise ings H on page 33 these can cause severe crushing injuries a t is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in The boot lid can be unlocked manually if there is a fault in the central locking sys the rear doors safety pushbutton S Fig 18 on page 35 when children are tem being transported on the rear seats Unlocking gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 59 p CAUTION gt Remove the warning triangle A Fig 17 gt Remove the panel B the cable for lever for opening the boot lid is located in Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric win the opening underneath the
249. le breaks down or an emergency situation occurs CAUTION Only use the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled i Note a The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on The cor responding warning light or gt in the instrument cluster also flashes a The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve a The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal light fails First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 The parking light and headlight flasher are also operated with the turn signal and main beam lever Right gt and left lt turn signal light gt Push the lever upwards A Fig 28 or downwards B gt If you only wish to flash three times the convenience turn signal briefly push the lever to the upper or lower pressure point and release again This fea ture can be activated deactivated via the information display page 15 gt Turn signal for changing lanes to only flash briefly move the lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position Fig 29 Interior lighting version 1 Main beam 20 gt Switch on the low beam gt Push the lever away from the steering wheel in the direction of arrow spring tensioned position Switching on gt The main beam is switched off by pulling the lever towards the steering wheel gt Pre
250. lid from the outside safety fea ture e g when stopping at traffic lights etc gt The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by pulling on the open ing lever of the respective door By the first pull on the opening lever the door is unlocked By the second pull on the opening lever the door is opened gt If at least one door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked gt In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle The central locking button can be used to control the convenience opening and closing of the windows page 36 EJ warnine The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off Chil dren should never be left unattended in the vehicle since it is difficult to pro vide assistance from the outside when the doors are locked Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard E Note If the safe securing system is activated page 28 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate Unlocking and locking 29 Introductory information You can use the remote control key to gt unlock and lock the vehicle gt unlocking boot lid gt open and close the windows page 36 Window convenience operation The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote contr
251. ltaneously or each individual mirror is possi ble in the Information display page 16 in the menu point Mirror adjust Adjusting the right hand exterior mirror gt Place the rotary knob into the position R The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob Switching off operating control gt Place the rotary knob into the position 0 Folding in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob gt Place the rotary knob into the position amp The mirrors are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position to a different one It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched on and at a speed of up to 15 km h Folding in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key gt If all of the windows are closed press and hold the lock button 3 Fig 13 on page 30 on the radio remote control for approx 2 seconds The exterior mirrors are folded back into the driving position after opening the door or switching on the ignition Tilting surface of front passenger exterior mirror On vehicles fitted with the memory function for the driver seat the surface of the mirror tilts down slightly when the reverse gear is engaged and the rotary knob is in the position R Fig 39 This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the pavement when parking the car The mirror returns into its initial position after the rotary k
252. mes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver to fasten the seat belt The warning light only goes out if the driver has fastened his seat belt If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver a permanent warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km h and simultaneously the warning light A flashes Instruments and warning lights 19 If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver during the next 90 seconds the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light 4 lights up permanently Further information page 125 Seat belts Dynamo t If the warning light lights up amp when the engine is running the vehicle battery is not being charged Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage The electrical system requires check ing EI WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 CAUTION If the warning light amp cooling system fault comes on in addition to the warning light amp when driving stop the vehicle immediately and switch the engine off risk of engine damage Open door The warning light amp comes on if one or several doors are opened The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes EI warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then p
253. mid weather conditions the headlights can be misted up from inside The temperature difference between interior and external area of the headlight lenses is decisive When the driving lights are switched on the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period although the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system Lights and visibility 39 Switching lights on and off Figs 22 Dash panel Light switch First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 Switching on the parking light gt Turn the light switch Fig 22 to position xe Switching on the low beam and main beam gt Turn the light switch to position 20 gt Push the main beam lever slightly forward in the spring tensioned position to switch on the main beam Fig 28 on page 45 Switching off lights except daytime running lights gt Turn the light switch to position O DAY LIGHT function Daylight driving light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 Switching on daytime running lights gt Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position O or AUTO AUTO Deactivating the daytime running lights gt Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds of switching on the ignition and at
254. mixture is produced gt OL Keep children away from the vehicle battery Inspecting and replenishing 165 Improper handling of the vehicle battery can cause damage We therefore recom mend that any work on the vehicle battery is carried out by a SKODA Service Part ner There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and burns when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applica ble rules of safety EI warnine a The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with the greatest of care Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs They corrode tooth enamel After contact with the skin the acid creates deep wounds which take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers slin cracks Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant devel opment of heat Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the bat tery vent openings Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield There is the danger of suffering blindness If any battery electrolyte comes into con tact with your eyes rinse th
255. mmend that the fuel system is cleaned by a SKODA Service Partner a Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults a Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system 158 General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening and closing the bonnet 10 Engine compartment overview 160 Checking the engine oil level 161 Replenishing the engine oil ST Changing engine oil 162 Coolant 162 Checking the coolant level GB Replenishing the coolant 163 Radiator fan 164 Checking the brake fluid _ CB Changing the brake fluid 164 Windscreen washer system 165 There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the en gine compartment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety The vehicle s engine compartment is a hazardous area E WARNING Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the engine compartment risk of scalding Wait until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key a f the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gears
256. n and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine Note To assist the combustion process of the soot particles we recommend that reg ularly driving over short distances should be avoided a Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce the life of the diesel particle filter A KODA specialist garage will be able to tell you which countries use only diesel fuel with high sulphur content Fuel reserve The warning light will come on if the fuel level is less than 9 litres An audible signal sounds as a warning signal The following is displayed in the information display Please refuel Range km Note The text in the information display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short distance Instruments and warning lights 23 Airbag system If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the airbag system The following is displayed in the information display Error Airbag The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off If a front side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using the vehicle system tester gt The warning light amp lights up for around 4 seconds after switching on the igni tion and then flashes approximately another 12 seconds in 2 second intervals The following is displayed in the information display Airbag belt tensioner deactivated The follo
257. n emergency petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used otherwise the engine can be severely damaged Fuel additives Only use unleaded petrol which complies with the standard EN 228 in Germany standard DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 98 RON as these meet all of the requirements for fault free engine operation We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used CAUTION a All KODA vehicles with petrol engines must only be operated with unleaded petrol Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust sys tem a Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used a Inno case may fuel additives with metal components be used especially not with manganese and iron content LRP lead replacement petrol fuels with met allic components may not be used There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system a Fuels with metallic content may not be used There is a risk of causing consider able damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system a The use of unsuitable fuel additives can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system Ethanol E85 Fig 130 MultiFuel power socket First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page
258. n has been switched on The en gine should be started immediately after the preglow warning light goes out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Before starting the engine place the gearshift lever into neutral or place the se lector lever in the position P or N and firmly put on the handbrake gt Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal switch on the ignition 2 Fig 94 on page 93 and start 3 do not operate the accelerator Depress the clutch pedal until the engine starts gt Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts After letting go the vehicle key will return to position 2 gt If the engine does not start within 10 seconds abort the start up process and turn the key to position 1 Repeat the start up process after approx half a mi nute gt Release the handbrake before starting off The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed The following is displayed in the information display Depress clutch to start The following is shown in the information display of the information cluster CLUTCH E First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 91 Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key into position 1 Fig 94 on page 93 This chapter contains information on the following subjects
259. n page 165 A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine gt Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components gt Only for quick charging Disconnect both battery cables first of all negative then positive gt Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red posi tive black negative gt Only now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the device gt When charging is completed Switch off the charger and remove the mains ca ble from the power socket gt Only then disconnect the charger s terminal clamps gt Reconnect the cables to the battery if necessary first of all positive then negative It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you re charge the vehicle battery using low amperages as for example from a mini charger Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer A charging current of 0 1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity or lower must be used until full charging is achieved It is however necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages so called quick charging Quick charging the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge We therefore recommend having the quick charging of vehicle batteries undertaken by a SKODA
260. n the Information display Move selector lever to position P N or in the instrument cluster display gt P N At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in the selector lever position P When parking on a level road surface it suffices to engage selector lever position P When parking on a slope the handbrake should be applied firmly before the park position is selected This ensures that there is no excessive pressure on the Gas lock mechanism and that it is subsequently easier to move the selector lever out r 10 14 of position P wa If the selector lever position N is accidentally selected while driving it is first nec Consumption essary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for the idling speed PS of the engine to be reached before the selector lever can be engaged in the drive i position a 18 5 OA 12440 1253 2 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Fig 102 Selector lever information display Selector lever positions ings H on page 102 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Starting off ings H on page 102 gt Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal oo gt Press the Shiftlock button button in the selector lever handle move the selec The current selector lever position is indicated in the information display of the tor lever into the desired position page 103 and then release the Shiftlock instrument clu
261. n the SET position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory gt If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than 30 km h the speed is not stored and the memory is erased The speed must then be stored again by pressing the rocker button B in the position SET after increasing the speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km h The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal which temporarily deactivates the system Switching off the cruise control system temporarily First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 99 The cruise control system is temporarily switched off by pressing the switch A Fig 100 on page 99 into the spring tensioned position CANCEL or by de pressing the brake or clutch pedal The set speed remains stored in the memory Briefly press the rocker button B into the position RES to resume the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released Switching off the cruise control system completely First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 99 gt Turn the switch A Fig 100 on page 99 into the OFF position 100 Using the system START STOP Fig 101 Button for the START STOP sys tem The START STOP system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing harmful exhaust emissions and CO emissions The function is automati
262. n the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible a f the wheel has to be changed on a slope first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away a f the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with at the works follow these guidelines page 172 New wheels and tyres a Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed Never position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack a Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent pos sible moving A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack causing the vehicle to fall down It is therefore always necessary to Do it yourself 179 HE WARNING Continued place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones tiled floor etc a Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack danger of suffering injury Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur pose CAUTION a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm a f the anti theft wheel bolt is fastene
263. n this connection is also the ambient temperature The im age Fig 127 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a cer tain distance at a temperature of 20 C and a temperature of 10 C Your vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in the winter than in the summer Checking tyre inflation pressures Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct The rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low This will not only increase fuel con sumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Avoid unnecessary ballast Transporting ballast costs fuel Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption It is worth checking the boot to avoid transporting any unnecessary ballast 142 Driving Tips It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the ve hicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre 100 kilometres At a speed of 100 120 km h your vehicle that is fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load will use use about 10 more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic drag Saving electricity When the engine is running the alternator generates a
264. n to the road surface at high speeds on wet roads One could experience aquaplaning uncontrolled movements of the vehicle swimming on a wet road surface Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres a Do not use summer or winter tyres that are older than 6 years or 4 years re spectively The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily However they must never be treated with grease or oil a f the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque the rim can come loose when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in per manent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts the wheel can loosen when the car is moving risk of accident a Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of tyres and snow chains CAUTION a f a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres the following must be observed page 173 Spare wheel The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm Protect the tyres from contact with oil grease and fuel a Replace any lost valve caps immediately SA For the sake of the environment Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption i Note a We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres is carried out by a KODA Service Pa
265. nclosed instructions Note The figure only applies to Combi vehicles Roof load First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 66 The maximum permissible roof load including roof rack system of 75 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded Seats and Stowage 67 The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is used In this case the roof rack system must only be loa ded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions E Fig 64 Centre console Opening the ashtray ashtray insert Fig 63 Cup holder Opening gt Press on the bottom part of the cover of the ashtray in area A Fig 64 Cup holder in front centre console i I Removing ashtray insert Two beverage containers can be placed into the recesses A Fig 63 s y gt Press on the ashtray insert in the region B Fig 64 the insert comes out and Cup holder in rear centre console take it out gt Press on the panel in the area B Fig 63 the cup holder comes out gt Pull the cup holder out as far as the stop gt Adjust the cup holder by moving the locking plate C E warnine a Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder If the vehicle moves they may spill risk of scalding Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain This
266. ncoming call is immediately interrupted a The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction steering wheel with telephone control or a phone mount and adapter a On vehicles which are factory fitted with the Columbus navigation system it is only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this device refer to the operating instructions for the Columbus navigation system Voice commands GSM II Basic voice commands Voice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands CALL XYZ This command calls up the contact from the phone book PHONE BOOK After this command for example the phone book can be repeated back to you a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc CALL HISTORY Lists of dialled numbers missed calls etc DIAL NUMBER After this command a telephone number can be en tered to establish a connection with the requested party REDIAL After this command the system calls the last dialled number MUSIC Play music from the mobile phone or another paired device FURTHER OPTIONS After this command the system offers additional context dependent commands SETTINGS Selection for setting Bluetooth dialogue etc CANCEL a On vehicles fitted with the Amundsent navigation system this function can be accessed via the navi The dialogue is ended gation sys
267. nd first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off as much as possible Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge a washing glove or a washing brush Work from the top to the bottom starting with the roof Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle s paintwork Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a second sponge for such areas Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leath er Washing with a high pressure cleaner First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 148 When washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation materi al Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle 149 EI WARNING Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters CAUTION The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 C risk of damaging the vehicle Preserving and polishing the vehicle paintwork First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings I on page 148 Preserving the vehicle paintwork Good wax treatment is an effective way of
268. nd a possibility of the alarm being triggered by movements from e g children or ani the electric sliding tilting roof are properly closed to ensure the full functionality mals within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported e g by of the anti theft alarm system train or ship or towed a Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in the radio remote control from other vehicles terior monitor To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle Fig 14 Button for interior monitor and towing protection monitoring TOMS Rear door Emergency locking of the door The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the alarm An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which have no locking cylinder it is only visible after opening the door gt Remove the panel A Fig 15 gt Insert the key into the opening under the panel and press the stopping lever as far as the stop toward the inside gt Replace the cover Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the driver door gt Press the button Fig 14 on the centre column on the driver side the sym bol amp that lights up in the button changes from red to orange gt Lock t
269. nd supplies electrical pow er If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on more fuel is needed to operate the alternator We therefore recommend switching off electrical components if these are no longer required Environmental compatibility Environmental protection has played a major role in the design selection of mate rials and manufacture of your new SKODA Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points Design measures gt Joints designed to be easily detached gt Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system gt Improved purity of different classes of materials gt Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 gt Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO gt Minimum fuel leakage during accidents gt Reduced noise Choice of materials gt Extensive use of recyclable material gt Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant gt No cadmium gt No asbestos gt Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture gt Solvent free cavity protection gt Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer gt No CFCs used in the production process gt Without use of mercury The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of gt Use of water soluble paints the road on which the vehicle is being driven
270. nformation and safety warn ings J on page 39 The cornering lights are used to illuminate the curves by means of the cone of light swivelling together with the front headlight with Xenon lights This function is active when the speed of the car increases to more than 10 km h The swivelling function of the headlights can be switched off on via the menu point Assistants in the main menu of the information display page 15 EJ warnine If the cornering lights are defective the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened Drive carefully and visit a SKODA specialist garage as soon as possible Parking light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 Parking light P lt gt Switch off the ignition gt Pull the turn signal light lever Fig 28 on page 45 upwards or downwards the side light on the right or left side of the vehicle is switched Parking light on both sides gt Turn the light switch into the position and lock the vehicle Note a The parking light PS can only be activated if the ignition is switched off a f the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off the parking light is not automatically switched on COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function First read and observe the introductory informat
271. ng 106 Selector lever lock 105 Selector lever positions 103 Starting off 103 Stopping 103 Tiptronic 104 Automatic load deactivation 169 Auxiliary heating auxiliary heating and ventila tion 87 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 143 B Before setting off 121 Belt tensioners 128 Bonnet Closing 160 Opening 160 Warning light 20 Boot Class N1 vehicles 61 Cover 63 Emergency unlocking 34 Fastening elements 61 Fixing nets 62 Fixing of the floor covering 63 foldable boot cover Combi 64 Light 47 see Boot lid 33 Unlocking the boot lid Variable loading floor Boot lid Automatic locking Warning light Brake booster 64 33 21 95 Brake fluid Checking Brakes Brake assist systems Handbrake Running in Warning light Braking Brake fluid Braking assistant Breakdown kit Bulbs Replacing Button in the driver s door Electric power windows 164 93 139 19 164 95 182 191 34 C Car computer see Multifunction display Car jack 12 Carrier Catalytic converter CD changer Central locking button Central locking system 179 66 139 T19 29 27 lock unlock Changes Changing Engine oil Wheel Charging a vehicle battery 28 177 162 179 168 Checking Battery electrolyte level 167 Brake fluid 164 Coolant level 163 Engine oil 161 Oil level 161 Windsc
272. ng and installing gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop gt Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 45 simultaneously press the locking button into the opening 2 using a flat screwdriver with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head restraint Fig 44 Head restraint adjusting removing gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat backrest until the locking button clicks into place a 58 Using the system E WARNING a The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat backrests they must be ready to use The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob jects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment if there is sudden braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged It is only then that the three point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its function CAUTION Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backrests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests m Fig 46 Unlock the seat backrest lock the seat backrest The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backrests forward The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats Folding the seat backrest forwa
273. ng down and turning the screwdriver gt Insert an Allen key SW 4 up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or open the sliding tilting roof gt Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards Have the fault rectified by a SKODA specialist garage Ei Note It is necessary after each emergency operation using the Allen key to move the sliding tilting roof into the basic position This is why the rotary switch must be set to the switch position A Fig 20 on page 37 and pressed forward for about 10 seconds CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Switching lights on and off 40 DAY LIGHT function Daylight driving light 40 Automatic driving lamp control 40 Cornering lights 4 Parking light 4 COMING HOME LEAVING HOME function 4 Tourist light 42 Fog lights 42 Fog lights with the function CORNER 42 Rear fog light 43 Instrument lighting 7 43 Headlight beam adjustment 20 44 Switches for the hazard warning light system 44 Turn signal and main beam lever 45 On models fitted with right hand steering the position of certain switches differs from that shown in Fig 22 on page 40 The symbols which mark the switch positions are identical however The low beam continues to shine while the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the position 20 or AUTO After sw
274. ning system Recommended gear 86 84 1 Refuelling Fuel Regulation Headlight beam Remote control 155 155 44 30 31 Synchronisation process Remote control key Replacing the battery Removable through loading bag Removing the seats Replacement of parts 26 76 59 177 Replacing Bulbs 191 Fuses 189 Vehicle battery 168 Windscreen wiper blade 51 Replenishing Coolant 163 Engine oil 161 Windscreen washer fluid 165 Roof luggage rack Attachment points 67 Roof rack system Roof load 67 Running in Brake pads 139 Engine 139 The first 1500 km 139 Tyres 139 S Safe securing system 28 Safety 121 Child safety 135 Child safety seats 135 Head restraints 58 ISOFIX 137 TOP TETHER 137 Save electrical energy 140 Seat Adjusting 55 Seat belt Warning light 19 Seat belt height adjuster 128 Seat belts Belt tensioners 128 Cleaning 154 fastening and unfastening 127 Height adjustment 128 Index 211 Seats folding forward 59 Head restraints 58 Heating 57 Selector lever see selector lever positions 103 Selector lever positions 103 Service display 10 Setting Automatic dimming interior mirror 52 Manual air conditioning system 84 Manual dimming interior mirror 51 Steering wheel 92 Setting temperature Heating 81 Setting the clock 11 Shiftin
275. nition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn a f the connected electric device becomes too hot switch it off and discon nect it from the power supply immediately CAUTION a Never exceed the maximum power consumption otherwise the vehicle s elec trical system can be damaged a Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle risk of battery draining a Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the 12 volt power socket 70 Using the system Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives Before turning the ignition on or off and before starting the car switch off the device connected to the 12 volt power socket to prevent any damage caused by voltage fluctuations Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices E Note The 12 volt power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical ac cessories with a total power uptake of up to 120 watt Overview The vehicle has the following storage compartments Storage compartment on the front passenger side page 71 Storage compartment on the driver s side page 71 Storage compartment on the dash panel page 72 Stowage compartment in front centre console Storage net in the front centre console page 72 page 72 Map pockets in the front seats page 73 Glass
276. nob is moved out of the position R and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km h Memory function for exterior mirrors On vehicles fitted with a memory function for the driver seat the relevant setting for the exterior mirrors is also stored automatically when the seat position is stor ed page 55 EJ warnine Convex curved outward exterior mirrors increase the field of vision They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following vehi cles Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles CAUTION Never mechanically fold in or fold back the exterior mirrors with the fold in func tion amp by hand as this will damage the electric drive Note a f the exterior mirrors were folded in using the rotary knob they can only be fol ded back into the driving position using the rotary knob a f the exterior mirrors were folded in using the remote control key and if the ro tary knob was in the fold in position before the ignition was switched on the mir rors will remain in the fold in position the next time the ignition is switched on The mirrors are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position to a different one a Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on a f
277. not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an emergency In this case just use water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and the coolant additive restored by a SKODA specialist garage as soon as possi ble Only use new coolant to top up the system Do not fill the coolant above the mark A max Fig 135 on page 163 Excess coolant heats up and then is forced out of the cooling system through the pres sure relief valve in the cap EJ warninec a The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health Avoid contact with the coolant Coolant vapours are also harmful to health Therefore always safely store the coolant additive in its original container out of the reach of children risk of poisoning f any coolant splashes into your eyes immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible a You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently swallowed coolant CAUTION Do not continue your journey if it is not possible to top up the coolant under the prevailing conditions Contact a SKODA Service Partner to avoid the risk of serious engine Inspecting and replenishing 163 Radiator fan First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the coolant temperature After switching off th
278. ns Delete Call Back can be selected Call register The following menu items can be selected in the menu item Call register Missed calls Received calls Dialled numbers Delete lists Voice mailbox In the menu Voice mailbox it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number The required numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel The numbers 0 9 symbol and the functions Delete Call Save Back can be selected Messages The menu Messages comprises a list of received text messages After calling a message the following functions appear Show Read the system reads out the selected message through the vehicle s speak ers Send time Callback Copy copies the incoming message to the SIM card Delete Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected in the menu Bluetooth User the overview of the stored users Connect Disconnect Rename Delete New user Search for users in the reception range a Visibility Switching on the visibility of the hands free system for other devices Media player Active device Paired devices Connect Rename Delete Authorisation Search search for available media players a Visibility Switching on the visibility of the hands free system for media play ers in the vicinity Extras Modem overview of the active and pair
279. nt in the front door in the rear door Seats and Stowage 73 A bottle holder is located in the area B Fig 76 of the storage compartment for the front doors E WARNING Use the area A Fig 76 of the storage compartment only for storing objects which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not im paired m Fig 77 Fig 78 Armrest Storage compartment cooling of storage compartment Front passenger seat Stowage compartment The armrest is adjustable for height and length Opening the storage compartment gt Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 78 Closing storage compartment gt Open the lid to the stop only then can it be folded downwards Setting height gt To open the lid pull the handle Fig 77 gt First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the ar gt When closing the lid hold the handle until the compartment is closed row 1 into one of the 4 fixed positions m WARNING Adjusting in the forward back direction gt Push the cover into the desired position The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety rea sons Opening air inlet gt Pull the cover A upwards E CAUTION Closing air inlet gt Carefully push the cover A downwards as far as the stop The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 5 kg in Weight g on vehicles fitted with air conditioning the storag
280. ntrol display Fig 145 Button for setting the tyre infla tion pressure control value First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 170 The tyre control display compares the speed and thus the rolling circumference of the individual wheels with the help of the ABS sensors If the rolling circumfer ence of a wheel is changed the warning light in the instrument clus ter page 24 Tyre control display and an audible signal sounds The rolling circumference of the tyre can change if gt the tyre inflation pressure is too low gt the structure of the tyre is damaged gt the vehicle is loaded on one side gt the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily e g when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill gt snow chains are mounted gt the temporary spare wheel is mounted gt one wheel per axle was changed Basic setting of the system After changing the tyre inflation pressure after changing one or several wheels the position of a wheel on the vehicle e g exchanging the wheels between the axles or when the warning light lights up while driving a basic setting of the sys tem must be carried out as follows gt Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure page 171 Service life of tyres gt Switch on the ignition gt Press and hold the button Fig 145 for longer than 2 seconds While pressing the button the warning ligh
281. nts 3 4 Fig 86 and 6 The air outlet vents 3 4 Fig 86 and 6 Fig 87 can be closed and opened indi vidually The air outlet vents 6 Fig 87 are only fitted on vehicles with the higher centre console Warmed unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the setting of the regulator of the heating or the air conditioning system and the atmospheric conditions i Note The air outlet vents 2 Fig 86 ensure in the ventilation and cooling mode for a comfortable A ones of the interior of the vehicle also if the air outlet vents 4 Fig 86 are closed E Heating Fig 87 Air vents at the rear Opening gt Turn the vertical wheel Fig 86 not into the end position Closing gt Turn the vertical wheel Fig 86 into the end position Fig 88 Heating Control elements gt 80 Using the system Setting temperature Auxiliary heating parking heating gt Turn the control dial A Fig 88 to the right to increase the temperature gt Press the button 3 Fig 88 to directly switch on off the auxiliary heating gt Turn the control dial A to the left to decrease the temperature auxiliary heating and ventilation Further information page 87 Controlling blower All controls apart from the blower switch B Fig 88 can be set to any desired gt Turn the blower switch B Fig 88 into one of the positions 1 to 4 to switch intermediate position the blower
282. observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The fuel gauge 6 Fig 2 on page 8 only operates when the ignition is switched on The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55 litres or 60 litres The warning light in the instrument cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve mark ingi page 23 An audible signal sounds as a warning signal Instruments and warning lights 9 CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty An irregular supply of fuel can lead to irregular engine running Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter i Note After filling up it can occur that during dynamic driving e g numerous curves braking driving downhill and climbing a steep hill the fuel gauge indicates ap prox a fraction less When stopping or during less dynamic driving the fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again This is not a fault Counter for distance driven First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres km In some countries the measuring unit miles mph is used Daily trip counter trip The daily trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since it was last reset in steps of 100 metres or 1 10 of a mile Press the button 5 Fig 2 on page 8 for more than 1 second to reset the display of
283. ogramme Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel consumption When adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal combined with sharp acceleration frequent changes in speed and exploit ing the top speed of the car the gearbox will adjust to this style of driving once the accelerator pedal kickdown function is depressed and will shift down earlier frequently by several gears in comparison to a moderate style of driving Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driv ing is a continuous process Irrespective of this it is however possible to switch or shift down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rap idly The gearbox shifts down into a lower gear in accordance with the speed therefore enabling rapid acceleration e g when overtaking without the accelera tor pedal having to be depressed into the kickdown range The original pro gramme will be reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again When driving in hilly regions the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill sections This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negoti ating an uphill stretch When driving downhill it is possible to shift down into the Tiptronic position in order to exploit the engine brake torque Automatic
284. ol key The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The operating range of the remote control key is approx 30 m But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak The key has a fold open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or replaced the system must be initialised by a SKODA Service Partner Only then can the remote control key be used again i Note a The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interfer ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency range e g mobile phone TV transmitter The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than 3 metres away page 26 a f the driver door is open the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control key 30 Using the system Locking unlocking Fig 13 Remote control key Unlocking the vehicle 3 gt Press the button 1 Fig 13 Locking the vehicle amp gt Press the button 3 Fig 13 Deactivating the safe securing system gt Press the button 3 Fig 13 twice within 2 seconds Further informa tion page 28 Unlocking the boot lid lt gt Press the button 2
285. older gt Fold the seat cushion back into its original position CAUTION For vehicles with heated rear seats it is necessary to disconnect the plug connec tion for the power supply before removing the seat cushion For reinstalling the seat cushion it is necessary to re connect the plug connection Rear armrest Fig 48 Rear seats Armrest gt The armrest can be folded down to increase comfort using the loop Fig 48 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Class N1 vehicles 61 Fastening elements 61 Folding double hooks 62 Folding hooks Estate car 62 60 Using the system Fixing nets 62 Fixing floor covering ofthe boot gt 6 Luggage net 63 Boot cover 63 Foldable boot cover Comb 4 Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling char acteristics of your vehicle gt Distribute loads as evenly as possible gt Place heavy objects as far forward as possible gt Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the fixing net page 61 In the event of an accident there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the more significant
286. ompartment cover in direction of arrow 1 Fig 56 gt Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves as far as the stop into the secured position marked with the arrows Fig 57 Folding gt Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 56 and the cover automatically rolls up into position Removing gt The fully folded luggage compartment cover can be removed to transport bulky goods by pressing on the side of the cross rod in the direction of the arrow 3 Fig 56 and taking it out by moving it in the direction of the arrow 4 E warnine No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover E 64 Using the system Removing the variable loading floor Fig 58 Boot Remove variable loading floor remove carrier rails gt Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes A Fig 58 to the left by around 90 gt Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow gt Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbour mounted fixing eyes C to the right by approx 90 EJ warnine Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened when installing the variable loading floor If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupants CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Using the net partition behind the rear sea
287. on and safety warn ings J on page 191 gt Remove the head light page 192 gt Turn the socket in the direction of arrow OPEN and remove it together with the warning light bulb Fig 161 gt Push in the bulb into the socket turn counter clockwise up to the stop and re move gt Insert a new bulb into the socket and turn clockwise up to the stop gt Insert the socket with the new bulb into the headlamp Secure it by turning it in the direction of arrow CLOSE Changing light bulbs for front parking lights and low beam Fig 162 Removing light bulbs for front parking lights and low beam First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 191 In order to facilitate the removal of the socket with the bulb for the parking light we recommend to remove first of all the connector for the low beam light bulb gt Remove the head light page 192 gt Remove the rubber cover 2 Fig 160 on page 192 gt To replace the bulb for the low beam turn the connector with the bulb Fig 162 counter clockwise up to the stop and remove gt Replace the lamp insert the connector with the new bulb and turn clockwise up to the stop gt To remove the bulb for the front parking light remove the holder A gt Remove the faulty bulb from the socket insert a new bulb and insert the sock et containing the bulb gt Insert the rubber cover Fuses and light bulbs 193 Changing the
288. on in the brake system The water content also lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications gt VW 50114 gt FMVSS 116 DOT4 EI WARNING Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system This greatly impairs the braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle l CAUTION Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle Windscreen washer system Fig 137 Engine compartment Wind screen washer fluid reservoir First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 The windscreen washer fluid reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the wind screen or rear window and for the headlight cleaning system The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment The filling level of the container is about 3 litres and about 5 5 litres on vehicles that have a headlight washing system Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights We therefore recommend using clean water with a screen cleaner including anti freeze in the winter that is able to remove stubborn dirt Antifreeze should always be added to the cleaning water in the winter even if the vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles Under exceptional circumstances methylated spirits can also be used i
289. on page 54 Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Pull the lever 1 Fig 40 up and push the seat into the desired position gt Release the lever 1 and push the seat until the lock clicks into place Adjusting height of seat gt To lift the seat pull or pump the lever 2 Fig 40 upwards gt To lower the seat push or pump the lever 2 downwards Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt To adjust the angle of the backrest relieve any pressure from the seat backrest do not lean on it and turn the handwheel 3 Fig 40 Adjusting lumbar support gt Turn the hand wheel 4 Fig 40 until the most comfortable curvature of the lumbar support is achieved Fig 41 Controls for the electric seat adjustment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 54 Adopt the correct seated position before setting page 54 Front seats Adjusting a seat in a forward back direction gt Press the switch A Fig 41 forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow 1 Set the height of the seat cushion gt Press the switch A Fig 41 upwards or downwards Adjust the angle of the seat cushion gt Press the switch A Fig 41 in the direction of the arrow 2 or 3 Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Press the switch B Fig 41 in the direction of the desired setting Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support gt Press the swi
290. on page 60 Fixing examples for a fixing net as a horizontal pocket Fig 52 A and vertical pocket Fig 52 B Fig 51 EI warnine Boot folding hooks NEF S5 Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1 5 kg Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of damaging the net B1Z 0318 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 60 62 Using the system E WARNING Only store soft objects in the luggage net up to a total weight of 1 5 kg Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently risk of injury CAUTION No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net as they can damage the luggage net Bi Fig 53 Boot Securing the floor covering RON55 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Removing the boot cover ings H on page 60 There is a loop or hook Combi located on the floor covering of the boot If you need to access the spare wheel for example the raised floor cover can be attach ed to a hook on the boot cover Fig 53 A or to the frame of the boot lid Com bi Fig 53 B a First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 60 The boot cover can be removed if you wish to transport bulky goods Bo
291. operated by means of the control dial Fig 20 and only functions when the ignition is switched on The control dial has several positions The sliding tilting roof can still be opened closed and tilted for approx 10 mi nutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as one of the front doors is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof Ep Note If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the slid ing tilting roof does not close fully This is why the rotary switch must be set to the switch position A Fig 20 and pressed forward for about 10 seconds Using the system Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 20 on page 37 Opening fully gt Turn the switch to position B Fig 20 on page 37 and hold it in this position spring tensioned position Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position D Fig 20 on page 37 Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Fig 20 on page 37 Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter If an obstacle e g ice pre vents closing the sliding tilting roof stops and opens completely The sliding tilt ing roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by turning the switch into position A Fig 20 on page 37 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding tilting roof to close completely H When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort posi
292. or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged immediately reduce your speed and stop Check the tyres for signs of damage bulges splits etc If no ex ternal damage is evident drive slowly and carefully to the nearest SKODA special ist garage to have the vehicle checked Wheels and Tyres 171 Handling wheels and tyres Fig 141 Changing wheels around First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 Changing wheels around If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres we recommend chang ing the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the dia gram Fig 141 You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life Storing tyres Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running can be maintained when mounted them again Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool dry and where possi ble dark place Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored up right New wheels and tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 Only fit tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and the same tread pattern on one axle on all 4 wheels
293. ot Luggage net gt Unhook the support straps 1 Fig 55 gt Place the cover in the horizontal position gt Pull the cover out of the holders 2 horizontally towards the rear gt To reinstall first of all push the boot cover into the holders 2 and then hook the support straps 1 on the boot lid The removed boot cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest EJ warnine Fi b the introductory inf ti d safet Ine Elon aaa ie Find eve E eng et E ene No objects should be placed on the boot cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something gt The luggage net is designed for the transportation of lighter objects Seats and Stowage 63 CAUTION Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not dam aged as a result of objects placed in this area i Note The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier Opening the boot lid also lifts up the boot cover 5 p CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg i Note The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects a F m a hL A ricom I Boot Dividing the boot with var iable loading floor Fig 56 Boot foldable boot cover removing foldable boot cover First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 60 Pulling out gt Pull the foldable luggage c
294. ottom edge of the mirror After the reverse gear is engaged the mirror always moves back into the normal position EI warninec The display lighting on the external navigation device may cause the automat ic dimming interior mirror to malfunction risk of accident For this reason do not fix any external navigation systems in the proximity of the automatic dim ming interior mirror 52 Using the system a Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear view mirror is not affected by other objects a Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor so that they do not impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation a f the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off the exterior mirror dim ming is also switched off Exterior mirror Fig 39 Inner part of door Rotary knob Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear view to the rear Heating of the external mirror gt Place the rotary knob into the position GA Fig 39 The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an outside temperature of 20 C Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously gt Place the rotary knob into the position L The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob The adjustment of both mirrors simu
295. ources of ignition naked flame smouldering cigarettes etc away from the battery risk of an explosion a Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns a nie Note a There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected a The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehi cle a We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist Do it yourself 185 Jump starting Fig 153 Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle A flat ve hicle battery B battery provid ing current First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 185 The jump start cables must be attached in the following sequence Connecting positive terminals gt Attach one end 1 Fig 153 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery gt Attach the other end 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power B Connecting negative terminal and engine block gt Attach one end 3 Fig 153 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power B gt Attach the other end 4 to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the engine block or to the engine block itself Starting engine gt Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle
296. p steep ramps l spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be gt So that any low slung parts such as the spoiler and exhaust do not touch the able to make limited repairs SKODA in the Czech Republic and its importers are ground and get damaged happy to provide information about technical aspects of the vehicle required This particularly applies to models with a sport suspension and also when your maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done E vehicle is fully laden 5 A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded pet rol page 156 Unleaded petrol Information regarding the locations of filling sta tions that offer unleaded petrol is for example provided by the automobile asso ciations a 1 Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements Driving andthe Environment 143 Driving through water on the street Fig 128 Driving through water The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water e g flooded roads gt Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of water The water level must fit around the strut on the side member as a maxi mum Fig 128 gt Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of the engine or into other p
297. pay par ticular attention while driving Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering gt The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the maximum inflation pressure of the standard tyres The temporary spare wheel R 18 must have an inflation pressure of 420 kPa gt Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest SKODA specialist ga rage as it is not intended for continuous use gt No other summer or winter tyres must be mounted on the rim of the temporary spare wheel R 18 FJ warnine Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged f the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the fit ted tyres never drive faster than 80 km h or 50 mph Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering CAUTION Observe the instructions on the sticker on the temporary spare wheel The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times Wheels and Tyres 173 Fullwheeltrim First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn Pulling off ings Hf on page 170 gt Push the plastic clip sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the clip are positioned at the collar of the cap and detach the cap Fig 143 Pulling off gt Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the
298. position 124 E WARNING The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants a Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is mov ing 122 Safety I WARNING Continued a f the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag a f the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt a The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag sys tem will not be able to properly protect you hazard When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure the arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed The sea
299. purchased from SKODA Original Ac cessories Inspecting and replenishing 159 Opening and closing the bonnet Fig 132 Securing the bonnet with the bonnet support First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 Opening gt Pull the release lever under the dash panel 1 Fig 131 Before opening the bonnet ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be dam aged gt Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 Fig 131 and the bonnet is unlocked gt Grab hold of the bonnet and lift gt Take the bonnet support out of its holder and secure the opened bonnet by in serting the end of the support in the opening 3 Fig 132 designed for it 160 General Maintenance Closing gt Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support Press the bonnet sup port into the holder designed to hold it gt Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 20 cm do not push it in Check that the bonnet is closed properly Engine compartment overview 8 ee ee 6 ee ete oat Fig 133 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI Petrol engine First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 158 1 Coolant expansion reservoir 163 2 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 165 3 Engine oil filler opening 161 4 Engine oil d
300. pwards The antenna must not be covered with the fin gers or the palm of the hand during this process Obstacles between the radio re mote control and the vehicle bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly reduce the range The auxiliary heating can only be switched on off safely using the radio remote control if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m Warning light in the radio remote control The warning light in the radio remote control C Fig 92 indicates after a key stroke if the remote control signal was received by the auxiliary heating and if the battery is adequately charged Display warning light Importance Lights up green for 2 seconds The auxiliary heating was switched on The auxiliary heating was switched off The ignition signal was not received Lights up red for 2 seconds Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds Heating and air conditioning system 89 Display warning light The auxiliary heating is blocked e g Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds because the tank is nearly empty or there is a fault in the auxiliary heating Flashes red for 2 seconds The switch off signal was not received Lights up orange for 2 seconds then The battery is weak however the green or red switching on or off signal was received Lights up orange for 2 seconds then The battery is weak however the flashes green or red switching on or off signal w
301. r front and outer rear seats gt belt tensioners for front seats gt seat belt height adjusters for front seats gt Front airbag for the driver and the front seat passenger gt side airbags gt head airbags gt anchoring points for child seat using the ISOFIX system gt anchoring points for child seat using the TOP TETHER system gt head restraints adjustable for height gt adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used Before setting off First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 121 For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off gt Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly gt Check the tyre inflation pressure gt Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside gt Secure all items of luggage page 60 Boot gt Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals gt Adjust the mirrors the front seat and head restraint to your body size gt Advise your passengers to adjust the head restraints to their body size
302. radio remote control Fig 8 B EE WARNING a Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle even if it is only for a short time This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment e g power windows risk of injury Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has come to a stop The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally risk of accident 26 Using the system CAUTION a Each key contains electronic components therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean Impurities textile fibres dust etc have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and igni tion lock Ea Note Please approach a KODA Service Partner if you lose a key as they can obtain a new one for you Replacing the battery in the remote control key Fig 9 Remote control key Remove cover remove battery Each remote control key contains a battery that is located under the cover A Fig 9 The battery needs replacing if red warning light Fig 8 on page 26 B does not go on when you press a button on the remote control key We recom mend that you ask a KODA Service Partner to replace the key battery However if you would like to replace the discharged battery yourself proceed as follows g
303. rapid tyre inflation pressure loss e g in the case of sudden tyre damage In this case care fully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements or sharp braking To ensure a proper functioning of the tyre control display it is necessary to re peat the basic setting every 10 000 km or once a year Wheels and Tyres 175 Wheel bolts First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design Each time you fit other wheels e g light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres you must therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of spherical cap This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly Winter tyres First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 170 The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry roads if you fit winter tyres Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice snow and at temperatures below 7 C because of their construction width rubber blend tread pattern This particularly applies to vehicles which are equipped with low profile tyres or high speed tyres code index H or V on wall of tyre To achieve the best possible handling properties winter tyres must be fitted on all 4 wheels the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyr
304. rating the buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the tele phone Fig 105 This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal telephone preinstallation hands free system at the factory The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current tele phone If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering Fig 105 Multifunction steering wheel Control buttons for the telephone wheel are illuminated Action Operation Switch on off the voice control Button PTT Push to talk Cancellation of the played message Turn upwards Increase volume Press briefly Turn downwards Decrease volume Press briefly Accept call end call entry in the main menu of the telephone list of the dialed numbers call the dialed contact Press button for a long pe Reject call private call riod of time Reject call list of the last calls access to the main menu of the phone list of dialled numbers Press briefly Reach one level higher in the menu according to the current position in the menu Press button for a long pe riod of time Leave the phone menu Press briefly Confirm menu selection Press button for a long pe i To the next initial letter in the telephone book riod of time Turn upwards The last chosen menu selection name Turn
305. ratures of less than 20 C gt with tears or punctures greater than 4 mm in size gt if there is damage to the tyre wall gt when driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre gt if the use by date see inflation bottle has passed EJ warninec a If you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance The national legal re quirements must be observed In this way you are not only protecting yourself but other road users as well a f the wheel is damaged or in the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible a A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre Do not drive faster than 80 km h 50 mph a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering a Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes a The sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into con tact with the skin SA For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in ac cordance with environmental protection regulations Note a Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions for the breakdown kit Anew bottle of sealant can be purchased from KODA Original Accessories a Immediately replace the wheel that was repaired
306. rder to cushion head and chest areas The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an extent after an accident to again provide a clear view forward EJ WARNING a For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dashboard A Fig 117 Not maintain ing this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant a The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to in juries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct a There must not by any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag a Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a prop er restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries a It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attach ing a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel page 133 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal inju ries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger
307. rds gt Before folding the seat backrests forwards adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests gt Unlock the seat backrest by pressing the securing knob A Fig 46 and fold it completely forwards Folding the seat backrest back into position gt Place the rear outer seat belt C Fig 46 behind the edge of the side trim pan el gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing Fig 47 Removing the seats knob clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest M gt Make sure that the red pin B is hidden On vehicles with divided rear seats the luggage compartment can be enlarged even more by folding the rear seats and removing them Folding forward gt Pull up the seat cushion in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 47 and fold for wards in the direction of the arrow 2 gt 1 Ifthe front seats are too far back we recommend that you have the rear head restraints removed before the seat backrests are folded forward Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled Seats and Stowage 59 Removing gt Fold the seat cushion forward gt Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow Fig 47 B and remove the seat cushion from its holder Install gt Press the wire clamp in the direction of the arrow Fig 47 B and put it into the h
308. recommend that the battery is replaced by a SKODA Service Partner where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be disposed of in accordance with national regulations Automatic load deactivation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 165 An intelligent vehicle power management system automatically takes various measures at high loads on the vehicle battery to prevent discharging of the bat tery This manifests itself by the following gt The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the electrical system gt Where appropriate large consumers of power e g seat heaters rear window heaters voltage supply to the 12V power socket have their power limited or in case of emergency shut off completely Note Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management the vehicle battery may be drained For example when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during lon ger parking Driving comfort is not put at risk by any shutting off of consumers Often the driver is not aware of it having taken place Inspecting and replenishing 169 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Service life of tyres 171 Handling wheels and tyres 172 New wheels and tyres 1
309. red position page 52 gt Take the vehicle out of gear The set position of the exterior mirror is stored Emergency Off The setting process can be interrupted if necessary by pressing any button on the driver s seat 56 Using the system il Note a Each new setting stored with the same button erases the previous setting a Each time new seat and exterior mirror settings for forward travel are saved the individual setting for the right exterior mirror for reverse travel must also be Saved again Assigning the remote control key to the memory button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 54 The remote control key must be assigned to the memory button to be able to re trieve the settings that are stored in the memory function via the remote control key Once the settings for the seat and exterior mirrors are saved page 56 Storing setting you have 10 seconds to assign the radio remote control to the appropri ate memory button gt Withdraw the ignition key gt Press the button 3 on the remote control key After the successful assign ment the turn signal lights flash and an audible signal will sound as a confirma tion The setting is stored with the memory button which you have selected Note If the remote control key is assigned to a memory button which has already been assigned to a radio remote control the old assignment is replaced by the new as signment
310. reen washer fluid 165 Children and safety 135 Child safety Side airbag 136 Child safety lock 27 Child seat Classification 136 ISOFIX 137 on the front passenger seat 135 Suitability 137 TOP TETHER 137 Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle 150 Cigarette lighter 69 Cleaning 148 Artificial leather 153 Headlight lenses 151 Material coverings 153 Materials 153 Natural leather 153 Plastic parts 150 Wheels 152 Clock 1 Clothes hooks 77 Cockpit 12 volt power socket 70 Ashtray 68 Cigarette lighter 69 General view 7 Light 45 Storage compartments 70 Compartments 70 Computer see Multifunction display 12 Coolant Checking 163 Replenishing 163 Temperature gauge 9 Correct seated position 122 Counter for distance driven 10 Cruise control system CCS 99 D Dash panel insert 8 Daylight driving light 40 Deactivating an airbag 133 Deactivating an airbag 133 Defrsoting rear window 47 Delayed locking of the boot lid see Boot lid 33 Diesel refer to Fuel 158 Diesel fuel Operation in winter 158 Diesel particulate filter 23 Digital clock 1 Dipstick 161 Display Coolant temperature 9 Service interval 10 Distance driven 10 Door Child safety lock 27 Warning light for an open door 20 Doors Emergency locking 32 Driving Abroad 143 Driving through water on the street 144 Emissions 197 Fuel consumption 197
311. reenLine GreenLine Top speed km h 191 192 191 190 191 186 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 11 3 11 4 11 4 12 2 Performances OCTAVIA MG5 COMBI DSG7 COMBI 4x4 MG6 b c Permissible trailer load braked kg 1400 1600 1400 4 a Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 730 a The value corresponds to the status with the Green tec package b Uphills up to 12 Uphills up to 8 qd Class N1 vehicles 204 Technical data 1 9 Itr 77 kW TD PD engine Output kW at rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm 77 4000 250 1900 4 1896 Performances OCTAVIA MG5 OCTAVIA DSG6 COMBI MG5 COMBI DSG6 COMBI 4x4 MG6 Top speed km h 192 189 191 189 181 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 11 8 12 2 11 9 12 3 12 9 a b Permissible trailer load braked kg 1400 1600 14002 E Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 670 680 670 680 740 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Class N1 vehicles 2 0 Itr 81 kW TDI CR engine l Output kW per rpm Max torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders Displacement cm MG5 81 4200 250 1500 2500 4968 MG6 DSG6 280 1750 2750 Performances OCTAVIA MG5 OCTAVIA MG6 OCTAVIA DSG6 COMBI MG5 COMBI MG6 COMBI DSG6 COMBI 4x4 MG6 Top speed km h 194 189 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 11 1 11 6 a b Permissible trailer load braked kg 1500 1700 1500 ens oo trailer load unbraked 740
312. ressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a full load page 171 Service life of tyres Trailer load The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan ces page 197 Technical data The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1000 metres above mean sea level As the engine output drops at an increasing altitude due to the declin ing air pressure and therefore the climbing ability is also reduced this means that the maximum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10 for every fur ther increase of 1000 m in height The towed weight comprises the actual weight of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device are merely test data for the towing device The vehicle specific values are detailed in the vehicle documents FJ warninec f the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the maximum per missible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer are exceeded this can cause accidents and serious injuries a Slipping loads can significantly affect the stability and safety of the vehicle trailer combination causing accidents and serious injuries Towing a trailer Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear
313. rges If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer period the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehicle battery a The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on if it has achieved a coolant temperature of approx 50 C a At low outside temperatures this can result in a formation of water vapour in the area of the engine compartment This is quite normal and is not an operating problem a After switching off the auxiliary heating the coolant pump runs for a short peri od a The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on if the ve hicle battery indicates a low loading state page 169 Automatic load deactiva tion 88 Using the system a The auxiliary heating parking heating does not switch on if the following was shown in the information display or before switching off the ignition Please re fuel a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice snow or leaves in order to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly a So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxili ary heating you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open position It is recommended to put the air flow in the position 2 or 5 Direct switching on off Fig 91 Button for direct switching on off of the auxili
314. rol unit has completed the search gt Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If the hands free system announces as standard SKODA_BT on the display of the mobile phone enter the PIN within 30 seconds and wait until the connec tion is established gt After terminating the connection confirm the creation of a new user profile in the information display If there is no free space available to create a new user profile delete an existing user profile During the connecting procedure no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands free system 1 Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN is either displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connec tion is completed by inputting a code If the authorisation input is required it must always be per formed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection 2 110 Using the system Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands free system whereby on ly one mobile phone can communicate with the hands free system The visibility of the hands free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes af ter the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile phone has connected to the hands free system Restoring the visibility of the hands free system
315. rrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system If the brake system is not used much or if there is corrosion on the sur face we recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes from a fairly high speed Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further the brake system may be faulty Visit a SKODA specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriate ly as you will not know how great the damage is Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 19 Brake system Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Handbrake Fig 95 Centre console Handbrake AR First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 93 Apply gt Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards Loosening gt Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking button Fig 95 gt Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied provided the ignition i
316. rtner a We recommend that you use wheel rims tyres full wheel trims and snow chains from SKODA Original Accessories Service life of tyres Fig 140 Tyre tread with wear indicators Open fuel filler flap with a table detailing the tyre size and tyre inflation pressure First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings J on page 170 Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres has 1 6 mm high wear indicators installed These wear indicators are located multiple times depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre Fig 140 a Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular symbols or other sym bols identify the position of the wear indicators The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points Tyre pressure The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insuffi ciently or over inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle Therefore check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 140 B The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa 0 2 bar higher than those for summer tyres The tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 205 50 R17 t
317. s and boot lid are closed and the vehicle is in your line of sight To avoid the car being locked inadvertently once in the car the lock button of the remote control must not be pressed before the key is inserted into the ig nition lock Should this happen press the unlock button 3 of the remote control Synchronisation If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no lon ger synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the radio operated key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery on the remote control was replaced This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows gt press any button on the remote control key gt pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 mi nute Introductory information The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle The system triggers audible and visual warning Signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle How is the alarm system activated The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked with the radio remote control or the key in the driver s door It is activated 30 seconds after locking the door How is the alarm system deactivated The alarm system is deactivated by pressing the unlock b
318. s deployed The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on In certain accident situations the several airbags may be deployed simultaneous ly The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Airbagsystem 129 Deployment factors It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits hard soft the impact angle vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which oc curs The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the rele vant restraint system If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suf fer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The following will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision gt driver s front airbag gt passenger s front airbag The following will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision gt front side airbag on the side of the accident gt head airbags on the side of the accident In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed gt
319. s easier to fully roll up the webbing the seat belt does not twist Belt inertia reel Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel This inertia reel offers you com plete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly If the brakes are ap plied suddenly the inertia reel will block The belts also block when the car accel erates when driving downhill and when cornering CAUTION When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not damage the door trim or other parts of the interior Seat belts 127 Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats Fig 115 Front seat Seat belt height ad juster Coy First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 125 The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size gt Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc tion Fig 115 gt Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has cor rectly locked in place Belt tensioners First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 125 Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three point seat belts The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a
320. s for the power windows in rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated the warning light 4 in the safe ty switch S lights up hig Note The window lift mechanism is equipped with protection against overheating Re peated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to over heat If this happens it will not be possible to operate the window for a short time You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the overheating protection has cooled down Unlocking andlocking 35 Window in the front passenger door and the rear doors open close Ale 1E Button arrangement in the front passenger door First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 34 A button for the relevant window is provided in these doors Opening gt Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position gt Additionally the window can be opened automatically fully open by pressing the button down to the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the win dow to stop immediately Closing gt Lightly press the appropriate button up and hold it until the window has moved into the desired position gt Additionally the window can be closed automatically fully closed by pulling the button upwards to the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the windo
321. s is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power out put and braking power of the engine The warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the cruise control system is activated FJ WARNING a For safety reasons the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel risk of accident The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions Always switch off the cruise control system after use to prevent uninten tional use of the system CAUTION a Always depress the clutch pedal if switching to the neutral position vehicle with a manual gearbox when the cruise control system is switched on Otherwise the engine can rev up unintentionally a The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with steeper gradients The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels Therefore shift to a lower gear in good time or slow the vehicle down by applying the foot brake i Note It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P N or R Storing a speed Fig 100 Turn signal and main beam lever Rocker switch and switch of the cruise control system First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings
322. s on A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand brake applied The following is displayed in the information display Release parking brake The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more than 6 km h for more than 3 seconds Stabilisation Control ESC Fig 96 ESC system TCS button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 93 The ESC is automatically activated after starting the engine The ESC helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it is being operated at its dy namic limits such as a sudden change to the direction of travel The risk of skid ding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on the conditions of the road surface The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle In the event of deviations such as if the car starts to skid the ESC automatically brakes the appropriate wheel The ESC cannot be switched off the button 8 Fig 96 only deactivates the TCS A system and the warning light amp in the instrument cluster lights up During an intervention of the system the warning light flashes in the instru ment cluster In the event of an ESC fault the ESC warning light illuminates in the instrument
323. seat pay attention to any relevant national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats a The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not have stickers attached be covered or modi fied in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects such as cup holders mobile phone mounts etc must be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity a Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel Side airbags Fig 118 Location of the side airbag in the driver s seat gas filled side airbag In the event of severe side collisions the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body chest stomach and pelvis of passengers in the ve hicle The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats Fig 118 A When the side airbags Fig 118 B are deployed the head airbag and belt ten sioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated air bag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pelvis is reduced on the side facing the door F WARNING a Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag Yo
324. splay Check oil level Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 161 The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds If no engine oil has been replenished the warning light will come on again after driving about 100 km The warning light flashes yellow engine oil level sensor faulty The following is displayed in the information display Oil sensor Workshop If the engine oil level sensor is faulty the warning light flashes several times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage EJ warnine If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 Electromechanical power steering 8 If the warning light lights up this indicates a partial failure of the power steer ing and the steering forces can be greater Seek help from a SKODA specialist ga rage If the warning light lights up this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the steering assist has failed significantly higher steering forces Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 92 F WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the
325. ss switch A Fig 29 towards the edge of the light the symbol appears spring tensioned position in the direction of arrow D Switching off Headlight flasher O l l l ae gt Press the switch A Fig 29 in the middle position O gt Pull the lever towards the steering wheel spring tensioned position in the di rection of arrow D the main beam and warning light lt 0 in the instrument clus Operating with the door contact switch ter come on gt Press switch A Fig 29 towards the middle of the light the symbol ap pears Parking light P lt _ Description of the operation page 41 Reading lights gt Press switch B Fig 29 to switch the reading lights on or off Lights and visibility 45 If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled switch A is in position Illuminated storage compartment on front passenger side the light will come on when gt the vehicle is unlocked gt When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger gt one of the doors is opened side the lighting in the storage compartment comes on gt or the ignition key is removed gt The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and t when the flap is closed E If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled switch A is in position Sea E oped er a the light will turn off when gt the vehicle is locked gt the ignition is switched on
326. ssing the button Fig 96 on page 95 and the warning light amp illuminates The following is displayed in the information display Traction control ASR deactivated Turn signal system lt gt Either the left or right gt warning light flashes depending on the position of the turn signal lever If a turn signal light fails the warning light flashes at twice its normal rate This does not apply when towing a trailer Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash Further information page 45 Turn signal and main beam lever Fog lights 0 The warning light comes on when the fog lights are operating page 42 The warning light comes on when the cruise control is operating page 99 m The warning light 20 comes on when low beam is selected page 40 a If the warning light lights up operate the brake pedal This is necessary to be able to move the selector lever from position P or N page 105 E The warning light 20 comes on when the main beam or headlight flasher are se lected page 45 E Instruments and warning lights 25 Introductory information Fig 8 Key without remote control key with remote control remote control key Two keys are provided with the vehicle Depending on the equipment your vehi cle can be equipped with keys without radio remote control Fig 8 A or with
327. ster 1 Fig 102 button P Parklock gt ao until the gearbox has shifted a slight engagement nudge can The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position gt Release the brake pedal and accelerate The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary Stop If you wish to move the selector lever into out of this position the Shiftlock but gt The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a ton in the selector lever handle and the brake pedal must be actuated at the short time such as at a cross roads It is sufficient to hold the vehicle stationary same time using the foot brake The engine can however be allowed just to idle If the battery is used the selector lever cannot be moved out of the position P Parking R Reverse gear gt Depress the brake pedal Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en gt Firmly apply the handbrake gine is idling gt Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever move the selector lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button m _ The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be pressed if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R P or N When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R the re verse lights will come on 1 Applies to AG Automatic gearbox 103 N Neutral The transmission is in Neutral in this position The
328. t 1 illuminates At the same time the sys tem memory is erased and the new calibration is started which is confirmed with an audible signal and then the warning light 1 goes out gt If the warning light does not go out after the basic setting this indicates a system fault Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage The warning light is lit If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in com parison to the stored basic value the warning light H lights up The warning light flashes i If the warning light flashes there is a system fault Seek help from a SKODA spe cialist garage to correct the fault FJ warninc a When the warning light illuminates immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressure a Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or unpaved roads the warning light 4 can be delayed or does not light up at all The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure For this reason the tyre inflation pressure must be checked regularly a The tyre control display does therefore not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control as the system cannot detect an even loss of pressure a The tyre control display cannot provide a warning in the event of very
329. t Flip out the key gt Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the region of arrows 1 Fig 9 gt Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down wards in the region of arrow 2 gt Insert the new battery Ensure that the symbol on the battery is facing up wards The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover gt Place the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place CAUTION a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery a The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original bat tery SA For the sake of the environment Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions fi Note Please approach a KODA Service Partner if you lose a key as they can obtain a new one for you The system has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the remote control key after replacing the battery page 31 Child safety lock Fig 10 Child safety locks on the rear doors e 4 B1Z 0273 The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside The door can only be opened from the outside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key Switching on gt Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door in the direction of the ar row Fig 10 Switching off gt
330. t backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury a Ensure that there are no objects in the driver s footwell as they may get caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate a Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes nec essary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is de ployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated posi tion Correct seated position for the driver Fig 110 The correct distance of the driver to the steering wheel The correct head restraint adjustment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 122 For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following setting gt Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A Fig 110 between the steer ing wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm gt Adjust the driver s seat in the forward back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs gt Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering whee
331. t read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The currently engaged gear A is shown in the instrument cluster display Fig 4 In order to minimise the fuel consumption a recommendation for shifting into an other gear is indicated in the display If the control unit recognises that it is beneficial to change gear an arrow B is shown in the display The arrow points up or down depending on whether you should shift into a higher or lower gear At the same time the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently en gaged gear A Instruments and warning lights TI CAUTION The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driving Situations such as overtaking CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Memory 12 Operation 13 Multifunction display details 13 Warning against excessive speeds 14 The multifunction display can only be operated when the ignition is switched on After the ignition is switched on the function displayed is the one which you last selected before switching off the ignition The multi functional indicator appears in the display Fig 5 on page 12 or in the information display page 15 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehi cle In vehicles with an information display page 15 there is an option to fade out some of the information EI warninec a Concentr
332. t trips the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge SA For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations Note You should replace batteries older than 5 years Battery cover Fig 138 Engine compartment Polyester cover of the vehicle battery plastic cover of the vehicle battery First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 165 The battery is located in the engine compartment in a polyester cover 1 Fig 138 or in a plastic cover 2 gt Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 1 or press the interlock on the side of the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 2 fold the cover up and remove gt The battery cover is installed in reverse order When working on the battery the edge of the polyester battery cover 1 is inser ted between the battery and the side wall of the battery cover Checking the battery electrolyte level Fig 138 Vehicle battery Electrolyte level indicator First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 165 We recommend you have the electrolyte level checked by a SKODA specialist ga rage from time to time especially in the following cases gt High outside temperatures gt Long daily drives gt After each char
333. t vents 3 Fig 86 on page 80 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards gt Press the button Fig 90 on page 85 The warning light in the top right or left corner lights up depending on which mode was last selected If the warning light in the top right corner of the button Fig 90 on page 85 lights up the Climatronic operates in HIGH mode The HIGH mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic When pressing again the button AUTO the Climatronic changes into the LOW mode and the warning light in the top left corner lights up The Climatronic uses only in this mode the lower blower speed However taking into account the noise level this is more comfortable yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air con ditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied By pressing the button again it is changed to HIGH mode Automatic mode is switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air distri bution or by increasing decreasing the blower speed The temperature is never theless regulated Switching the cooling system on and off Switching the cooling system on and off gt Press the button AC 13 Fig 90 on page 85 The warning light in the button lights up gt When you again press the button AC 13 the air conditioning system is switch ed off The warning light in the button goes out Only the function of the venti lation remains active when no low
334. tch C forwards or backwards Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support gt Press the switch C upwards or downwards i Note If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjustment once again press the switch in the appropriate direction and complete the adjust ment of the seat a Seats andStowage 55 Storing setting Fig 42 Memory buttons and SET button First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 54 The memory function for the driver s seat provides the option to store the individ ual positions of the driver s seat and the external mirrors A setting position can be allocated to each of the three memory buttons B Fig 42 i e three in total Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward gt Switch on the ignition gt Adjust the seat page 55 Adjusting front seats electrically gt Adjust both of the exterior mirrors page 52 gt Press the button A Fig 42 gt Press one of the memory buttons B within 10 seconds after pressing the but ton an acknowledgement signal confirms that the seat setting is stored Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing gt Switch on the ignition gt Press the required memory button B Fig 42 gt Move the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control into position R page 52 gt Engage reverse gear gt Move the right exterior mirror into the desi
335. ted towing device the border of the danger area Starts continuous tone 5 cm further away from the vehicle The length of the ve hicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer 98 Using the system Activating deactivating the rear parking aid The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is turned on This is confirmed by a brief audible signal The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear Activating deactivating the front and rear parking aid The parking aid is activated when the ignition is turned on and reverse gear is en gaged and or by pressing the button Pa Fig 99 the symbol Pu lights up in the button This is confirmed by a brief audible signal The parking aid is deactivated by pressing the button Pa or at a speed of more than 10 km h the symbol P in the button is no longer illuminated EI warnine The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they are not recognised by the parking aid sensors Before reversing or parking check that there is no small obstacle such as a rock thin post trailer drawbar etc in front of or beh
336. tem menu refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system If a voice command is not detected the system answers with Sorry and a new entry can be completed After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid After the 3rd error the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice entry for the contact in the menu Phone book Voice Tag Record Your own voice entry can also be saved using the voice control in the menu FUR THER OPTIONS Voice commands GSM III Basic voice commands Voice command Action HELP After this command the system repeats all possible commands After this command a name can be entered to es tablish a connection with the requested party CALL NAME After this command a telephone number can be en tered to establish a connection with the requested party The last selected telephone number is selected DIAL NUMBER REDIAL The system reads out contacts from the telephone book The system reads the messages which were re ceived while the telephone was connected to the control unit READ ADDRESSBOOK READ MESSAGES The help is significantly reduced good operating SHORT DIALOGUE knowledge provided LONG DIALOGUE CANCEL The help is not reduced suitable for beginners
337. temperature for example when getting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold Recirculated air mode Recirculated air mode largely prevents polluted air from outside the vehicle get ting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when stand ing in a traffic jam If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is rec ognized by the air quality sensor when the automatic air distribution control is switched on the air distribution control will temporarily be switched off If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level the air distribution con trol is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior When the automatic air distribution control is switched on an air quality sensor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air Switching recirculated air mode on gt Repeatedly press the button s 5 Fig 90 on page 85 until the warning light on the left side of the button is illuminated Switch on automatic air distribution control gt Repeatedly press the button lt s 5 Fig 90 on page 85 until the warning light on the right side of the button is illuminated Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily gt If the air quality sensor does not automatically switch on the air dis
338. than 1 second The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and on vehicles which are fitted with an information display it is 99 hours and 59 mi nutes The indicator is set back to zero if this period is exceeded Current fuel consumption The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres 100 km You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consump tion Instruments and warning lights 13 The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in litres 100 km page 12 If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time you must set the memory at the start of the new measurement to zero us ing the button B Fig 6 on page 13 After erasing the memory no value appears in the display until you have driven 300 m The display is updated regularly while you are driving Range The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display It indicates the dis tance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the level of fuel in the tank and the same style of driving The display is shown in steps of 10 km After lighting up of the warning light for the fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km The fuel consumption over the last 50 km is used to calculate t
339. the amount of coolant additive can only be increased up to 60 antifreeze protection down to approx 40 C The antifreeze protection tails off above that concentration Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these coun tries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 When refilling we only recommend you use the same antifreeze written on the antifreeze expansion tank Fig 135 on page 163 162 General Maintenance Coolant capacity 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI 1 4 1 59 kW 1 4 Itr 90 kW TSI 1 6 1 75 kW 1 8 Itr 112 kW TSI 1 8 Itr 118 kW TSI 2 0 Itr 147 kW TSI 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR 1 9 1 77 kW TDI PD 1 9 Itr 77 kW TD PD DPF 2 0 Itr 81 kW TDI CR 2 0 Itr 103 kW TDI CR DPF 2 0 Itr 125 kW TDI CR CAUTION a Other coolant additives that do not comply with the correct specifications can above all significantly reduce the anticorrosion effect Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can conse quently result in major engine damage Note On vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater auxiliary heating and ventila tion the coolant capacity is approx 11 larger Checking the coolant level Fig 135 Engine compartment Coolant expansion reservoir First read and observe the introductory information an
340. the daily trip counter Odometer The odometer indicates the total distance in kilometres or miles which the vehicle has been driven Fault display If there is a fault in the instrument cluster Error will appear continuously in the display Ensure the fault is rectified as soon as possible by SKODA a specialist ga rage i Note For vehicles fitted with the information display if the display of the second speed is activated in mph or km h this driving speed is indicated instead of the counter for the total distance driven 10 Using the system Service Interval Display Fig 3 Service Interval Display Note 0 7 a ae First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 8 The display can vary depending on the equipment Service Interval Display Before the next service interval a key symbol gt and the remaining kilometres are indicated for 10 seconds after switching on the ignition Fig 3 At the same time the remaining days until the next service interval are displayed The following is displayed in the information display Service in km or days The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or where applicable days until the service due date is reached As soon as the due date for the service is reached a flashing key symbol lt and the text Service appears in the display for 20 seconds after the ignition has
341. the electronic systems in your vehicle ore The reasons for this are as follows We recommend that the installation of mobile phones and two way radio sys gt no external aerial tems in a vehicle be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner gt external aerial incorrectly installed Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth communication are compatible gt transmission power greater than 10 watts with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III Ask a SKODA Serv ice Partner to find out if your phone is compatible with the universal telephone K WARNING preinstallation GSM II or GSM III The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands free system is restricted a Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully re to the vehicle interior The range is dependent on local factors e g obstacles be sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Use the telephone system only to tween the devices and mutual interferences with other devices If your mobile such an extent that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time phone is in a jacket pocket for example this can lead to difficulties when estab a The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be ob lishing a connection with the hands free system or transferring data served Communication 107 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply ope
342. the first 200 km or so Catalytic converter Proper operation of the emission control system catalytic converter is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmentally conscious way The following guidelines must be observed gt Vehicles fitted with a petrol engine must always be refueled with unleaded pet rol page 156 Unleaded petrol gt Do not pour too much oil into the engine page 161 Checking the engine oil level gt Do not switch off the ignition while driving If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available you must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory Driving and the Environment 139 FI WARNING a In view of the high temperatures which can be produced in the catalytic con verter the vehicle should be parked in such a way that the catalytic converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials under the vehicle risk of fire a Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters or heat shields risk of fire CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and exhaust system a Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust system
343. the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb gt Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs The designa tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb gt A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot EI WARNING Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty by other road users a Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 158 Engine compartment a Bulbs H7 and H1 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb Gas discharge bulbs xenon bulbs operate with a high voltage professional knowledge is required danger to life CAUTION a Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth nap kin or similar a When removing and installing the headlight make sure that the paintwork of the vehicle and the headlight are not damaged 192 Do it yourself TL Note a This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising Other light bulbs should be
344. this must be in the direction of travel due to different legal regulations applying page 135 Transporting children safely gt not being able to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest despite the driver s seat being correctly adjusted gt special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability gt other seats have been installed e g orthopaedic seats without side airbags The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key operated switch page 133 Key switch for the front seat passenger airbag We recommend that you ask a SKODA Service Partner to switch off any other air bags Monitoring the airbag system The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment gt The airbag warning light 2 illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then flashes approximately another 12 seconds in 2 second in tervals The following applies if the airbag has been switched off using the key switch in the storage compartment gt The airbag warning light 2 comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on gt The deactivated airbag is indicated by the illumination of the warning light AIRBAG OFF in the middle of the dash panel Fig 120 on page 133 3 i Note The na
345. tion the intensity of the wind noise is much less The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open F WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury Unlocking and locking 37 CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism and seal Convenience operation An open sliding tilting roof can also be closed from the outside gt Press and hold the lock button 8 on the remote control key or keep the key in the lock cylinder of the driver s door in the locked position H The closing operation stops immediately when you release the key or the lock button EI warnine Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing Emergency operation Fig 21 Point for positioning screwdriver opening for positioning the key The sliding tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if the system is faulty The emergency operation of the sliding roof is located underneath the glasses storage box 1 page 73 Glasses storage box gt Open the glasses storage box gt Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the po sitions shown by the arrows 1 Fig 21 38 Using the system gt Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressi
346. tional regulations for switching off airbags must be observed a A SKODA Service Partner will be able to inform you which airbags in your vehicle can must be deactivated Key switch for the front seat passenger airbag Fig 120 Storage compartment Key operated switch for the front passenger airbag warning light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch Deactivating an airbag gt Switch off the ignition gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 Fig 120 OFF Airbagsystem 133 gt Check whether the warning light AIRBAG OFF in the middle of the dash panel 3 lights up when the ignition is switched on Activating an airbag gt Switch off the ignition gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 Fig 120 ON gt Ensure that the warning light AIRBAG OFFin the middle of the dash panel 3 does not light up when the ignition is switched on Warning light AIRBAG OFF airbag switched off If the front passenger airbag is switched off the warning light comes on for about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on There is a system fault in the deactivated airbag I if the airbag warning light flashes Immediately visit a SKODA specialist garage E WARNING The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched
347. tly a The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decou pling the trailer a For technical reasons trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the anti theft alarm system Towing a trailer 147 General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Washing the vehicle _ SD Automatic car wash systems 149 Washing by hand 149 Washing with a high pressure cleaner gt gt 9 Preserving and polishing the vehicle paintwork 150 Chrome parts 150 Paint damage __ S55 Plastic parts 150 De icing windows and exterior mirrors 151 Radio reception and aerial ST Headlight lenses 151 Rubber seals 151 Door lock cylinders SSS Y Wheels 152 Underbody protection 152 Protection of hollow spaces 582 Artificial leather and materials 153 Fabric covers on electrically heated seats 153 Natural leather 5B Seat belts 154 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relat ing to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork We recommend using care products from KODA Original Accessories that are available from SKODA Service Partners The instructions for use on the package must be observed 148 General Maintenance EI wARNING Care products may be harmful to your health if not used
348. tmat which is attached to the two correspond ing attachment points may be used Only use footmats from the range of SKODA Original Accessories which are fitted to two attachment points F WARNING No objects are allowed in the driver s footwell risk of obstruction or limita tion in operating the pedal Starting off and Driving 97 Parking aid Fig 99 Parking aid Range of the sensors activating the parking aid The parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear bumper and an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors The sensors are integrated in the front rear bumper The signal tones for the front parking aid sound higher than for the rear parking aid The tones of the parking aid can be adapted in the menu of the Information display page 16 Range of sensors The distance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle at the rear of the vehicle and about 120 cm from the obstacle in front of the vehicle A Fig 99 The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm B Fig 99 danger area From this moment on do not continue driving On vehicles with a factory fitted radio or navigation system the distance to the obstacle is simultaneously graphically illustrated on the display refer to the oper ating instructions for the radio or navigation system On vehicles with a factory fit
349. to a greater extent Trade in and recycling of old cars SKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to pro tecting the environment and the preserving resources All new SKODA vehicles When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle oncoming drivers To prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled the headlights must be can be utilized up to 95 and always be returned In a lot of countries sufficient adjusted by a SKODA Service Partner trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After o you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in Headlights with Xenon lights are adjusted in the menu of the information dis accordance with environmental regulations play page 15 MAXI DOT information display fi Note i Note Detailed information about the trade in and recycling of old cars is available from Further information on adjusting the headlights is available from a SKODA Service a SKODA Service Partner m Partner E To prevent damage to your vehicle pay special attention gt When driving on poorly maintained roads and lanes In certain countries it is also possible that the KODA Service Partner network is gt When driving over kerb stones limited or has not been established yet This is the reason why procuring certain gt When driving u
350. towards the side windows in the deploy ment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head air bag is deployed 5 For the sake of the environment The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de iced or free from mist The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel econ omy page 142 Saving electricity Lights and visibility 47 Sun screen Fig 34 Sun screen unroll remove The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover If re quired you can remove the housing with the sun screen from the luggage com partment cover Pulling out gt Remove the sun screen using the loop A and hang it from brackets Fig 34 Folding gt Remove the sun screen from the brackets B Fig 34 and hold it on the loop A so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the luggage compartment cover without being damaged Removing gt Unhook the support straps C from the boot cover Fig 34 gt Roll up the sun screen again into the housing on the luggage compartment cover gt Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 and take out the sun screen in the direction or arrow 2 D On vehicles which do not have a contact switch for the bonnet the windshield wiper and wash sys tem operates also when the bonnet is opened 48 Using the system
351. towing eye in the direction of arrow 3 Fig 155 on page 187 until the stop tighten For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye gt After unscrewing the towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly Octavia Scout gt Press on the top area of the cap B Fig 156 remove it gt Manually insert the towing eye in the direction of arrow 3 Fig 155 on page 187 until the stop tighten For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye 188 Do it yourself gt After unscrewing the towing eye put the cap on and press into place The cap must engage firmly CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting Fig 157 Rear bumper removing the cap rear bumper Installing the towing eye First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings on page 186 gt Unlock the bottom part of the cap by pulling it downwards in direction of arrow 1 Fig 157 gt Unlock the upper area of the cap by pulling in the direction of the arrow 2 re move the cap gt Manually insert the towing eye in the direction of arrow 3 until the stop tight en For tig
352. tribution control in the event of an unpleasant odour you can switch it on yourself by pressing the button s4 5 Fig 90 on page 85 The warning light lights up in the button on the left side Switching recirculated air mode off gt Press the button Fig 90 on page 85 or repeatedly press the button 5 Fig 90 on page 85 until the warning lights in the button go out F WARNING Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time as stale air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increases Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up Note a f the windscreen mists up press the button 1 Fig 90 on page 85 Press the button Fig 90 on page 85 when the windshield is demisted a The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature is higher than approx 2 C Controlling blower The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature However the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular needs gt Repeatedly press the button 10 Fig 90 on page 85 on the left side reduce blower speed or on the right side increase blower speed If the blower is switched off the Climatronic system is switched off The set blower speed is displayed above the button s
353. ts 65 Using the net partition behind the front seats 66 Removing and installing net partition housing 66 EJ warnine The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and backrests they must be ready to use The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no ob jects in the boot can slide forwards if there is sudden braking risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged It is only then that the three point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its function a Ensure that the cross rod is inserted into the mounts C Fig 59 on page 65 or Fig 60 on page 66 in the front position Using the net partition behind the rear seats Fig 59 Folding down the storage compartment cover pulling out the net partition First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 65 Pulling out gt Fold down the storage compartment cover D Fig 59 behind the rear seats gt Pull the net partition by the bracket A out of the housing B in direction of the mounts C gt Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards gt In the same way insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle gt Fold the storage compartment cover D downwards Folding gt Fold down the storage compartment cover D Fig 59 behind the
354. tting into the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing ina traffic jam Switching on gt Press the button lt s 4 Fig 89 on page 82 and the warning light in the but ton illuminates 84 Using the system Introductory information The Climatronic maintains fully automatically a convenience temperature This is achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the air flow the blower stages and air distribution The system also takes sunlight into account which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually The automatic mode page 86 ensures maximum well being of the occupants at all times of the year Description of Climatronic system The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met gt engine running gt outside temperature above approx 2 C gt Fig 90 on page 85 switched on The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to pro vide cooling at a high load of the engine Recommended setting for all periods of the year gt Set the desired temperature we recommend 22 C gt Press the button Fig 90 on page 85 gt Move the air outlet vents 3 Fig 86 on page 80 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards fi Note a We recommend that you have the Climatronic system cleaned by a KODA spe cialist garage once every year a On vehicles equipped with a factory fitted radio or radio navigation syst
355. ttings 16 Mirror Automatic dimming interior mirror 52 Exterior mirror 52 Manual dimming interior mirror 51 Vanity 47 Mobile phone 107 109 12 Connecting to the hands free system 110 113 Multifunction display Functions 12 Memory 12 Operation 13 Multimedia 118 AUX IN 119 MDI 119 N Net partition 65 O Oil refer to Engine oil 161 Onboard computer see Multifunction display gt R Operation in winter De icing windows 151 Diesel fuel 158 Vehicle battery 167 Outside temperature 13 Overview Engine compartment 160 Warning lights S B P Paint see Paint damage 150 Paint damage 150 Parking Parking aid 98 Parking ticket holder 77 Passive Safety 121 Periodic wiping 49 Petrol refer to Fuel Polishing the paintwork refer to Taking care of your vehicle Power steering Power windows Button in the driver s door Button in the front passenger door Button in the rear doors Operational faults 156 150 92 35 36 36 37 Preservation refer to Taking care of your vehicle R Radiator fan Radio reception Aerial Functional fault Raise vehicle Rear mirror Automatic dimming interior mirror Exterior mirror Manual dimming interior mirror 150 164 151 151 181 52 52 51 Recirculated air mode Climatronic Manual air conditio
356. u might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This ap plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat page 136 Child safety and side airbag There must not be any further persons animals as well as objects posi tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No ac cessories such as cup holders should be attached to the doors a f children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident This can re sult in serious injuries page 135 Child seat Airbag system 131 HE WARNING Continued The airbag control unit operates with pressure sensors located in the front doors For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels e g additional installation of loudspeakers Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a SKODA special ist garage a In the event of a side collision the side airbags will not function properly if the sensors cannot measure the increasing air pressure inside the doors be cause the air can escape through large non sealed openings in the door pan el a Never drive with removed inner door panels a Never drive if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the remaining openings have not been prop
357. ult a SKODA Service Partner to determine which engine your vehicle is equipped with The listed performance values were determined without performance reducing equipment e g air conditioning system Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome This number is al so located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code Engine number The engine number is stamped into the engine block Data on the vehicle data sticker and the type plate OODODOOOOOOO KK AIX XKX KIX 2 OOOO XX KX XXNX lt OA 1D0 SSL SRG IKS 6FA 1AC SFA E IND H amp S 4UC 485 3NC 3AT 4x0 443 BLI JIL GIO BGU 6YO KH GRE 40 BYF BGA GKO 4F1 B37 7MG GNO 3L3 9PO 7KO 92F OWD 740 30N JAA GO2 LOZ 7P4 FOA 384 2UA 5 Ott Gee oo eee KIK T o MMM Fig 170 Vehicle data sticker type plate Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker Fig 170 is located on the floor of the boot and is also stated in the service schedule The vehicle data sticker contains the following data 1 Vehicle identification number VIN 2 Vehicle type 3 Gearbox code paint number interior equipment engine output engine code 4 Partial vehicle description 5 Operating weight in kg 6 Fuel consumption in Itr 100 km intra urban extra urban combined CO emission levels combined
358. upant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven never place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats This is particularly important for the front seat passenger You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an airbag is deployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position a t is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel Not maintaining this mini mum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard a Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as they may get caught be hind the pedals when driving or applying the braking You would then no lon ger be able to operate the clutch brake or accelerate Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects e g child safety seat provided for this purpose risk of accident i Note After a certain time play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle Manually adjusting the frc Fig 40 Controls for manual seat adjust ment First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H
359. using the breakdown kit or consult a SKODA specialist garage about repair possibilities Components of the breakdown kit 1E 2 E 3 11 10 B1Z 0481 Fig 152 Components of the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 The breakdown kit contains the following parts Valve remover Sticker with speed designation max 80 km h max 50 mph Inflation hose with plug Air compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core FE ele eA The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core This is the only way in which you can remove and re install the valve core from the tyre valve The same also applies to the replacement valve core 1 Do it yourself 183 Preparing to use the breakdown kit First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 182 The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the breakdown kit gt In the event of a puncture park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible gt Let all of the occupants get out While changing a tyre the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier gt Sw
360. utton on the radio re mote control The anti theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle If the vehicle is unlocked by inserting the key into the driver door the key must be inserted into the ignition lock and the ignition switched on within 15 seconds of unlocking the door to deactivate the alarm system The alarm is triggered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds When is the alarm triggered The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored gt bonnet gt boot lid gt doors gt ignition lock gt Vehicle inclination page 32 gt Interior of the vehicle page 32 gt A drop in voltage of the on board power supply gt Socket of the factory fitted towing device An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon nected while the anti theft alarm system is activated How is the alarm switched off The alarm is switched off by unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control or switching on the ignition Unlocking andlocking 31 i Note i Note a The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years a Switch off the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring if there is a Before leaving the car it must be checked that all of the windows doors a
361. ve the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 102 Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lever or multifunction steering wheel Switching to manual shifting gt Push the selector lever to the right out of position D The selector lever posi tion you have engaged is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear 1 Fig 102 on page 103 on the right Shifting up gears gt Press the selector lever forwards Fig 103 gt Pull the right rocker switch towards the multifunction steering wheel Shifting down gears gt Press the selector lever backwards Fig 103 gt Pull the left rocker switch towards the multifunction steering wheel Temporarily switching to manual shifting gt If the selector lever is in position D or S pull the left rocker switch or the right rocker switch towards the multifunction steering wheel gt Manual shifting switches off if the rocker switches or are not actuated for some time You can also switch off the temporary switch over to manual shift ing by pressing the right rocker switch for more than 1 second It is possible to switch to manual shifting when the car is stationary and when driving When accelerating the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If a lower gear is selecte
362. vehi cle s roadworthiness may be put at risk and increased wear on parts may arise Any damage caused by technical changes made without consent by SKODA is ex cluded from the warranty see the warranty certificate EJ warnine a Work or modifications on your vehicle which have been carried out unpro fessionally can cause operational faults risk of accident a We advise you in your own interest to only use KODA Original Accessories and SKODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle Reliability safety and suitability have been established for SKODA Original Accessories and SKODA Original Parts Although we constantly monitor the market we are not able to assess or warrant the parts even though in some instances such parts may have a type approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing labo ratory KE Note KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts can be purchased from SKODA Service Partners who will also professionally undertake the assembly of the purchased parts Changes and impairments of the airbag system Repairs and technical modifications must comply with KODA guidelines We recommend that any modifications and repairs to the front bumper doors front seats headliner or bodywork be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner These vehicle parts may include system components for the airbag system F waRNiNG Airbag modules can not be repaired
363. ven if the ignition is off Bonnet gt The warning light 2 gt comes on if the bonnet is unlocked If the bonnet unlocks while driving the warning light 2 lights up and an audible signal sounds The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes EJ WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 44 Boot lid The warning light lt comes on when the ignition is switched on if the luggage compartment door is open If the boot lid opens while driving lt the warning light lights up and an audible signal sounds The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes Engine oil The warning light lights up red low oil pressure The following is displayed in the information display Oil Pressure Engine off Owner s manual Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the engine oil page 161 Checking the engine oil level Even if the oil level is correct do not drive any further if the warning light is flashing Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage The warning light lights up yellow oil quantity too low The following is displayed in the information di
364. view mirrors The national legal requirements must be observed Headlights The headlight settings must be checked before starting a journey with a coupled trailer If necessary adjust the settings with the headlight beam adjust ment page 44 Headlight beam adjustment 20 Driving speed For safety reasons do not drive faster than the maximum permissible speed indi cated on the trailer Towing a trailer 145 Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trail er is detected Never attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by accelerating Brakes Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake Trailer stabilisation The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works in conjunction with the counter steering assistance to reduce the amount the trail er sways After turning on the ignition the ESC warning light amp in the instru ment cluster lights up for about 2 seconds longer than the ABS warning light Prerequisites for stabilising the trailer gt The towing device is factory fitted or a compatible towing device has been ret rofitted gt The ESC is active The warning light 5 or amp in the instrument cluster is not
365. w to stop immediately Force limiter of the power windows First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 34 The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows If there is an obstacle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres 36 Using the system If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec onds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time even though the obstacle was not yet been re moved the closing process is only stopped During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds the window will now close with full force If you wait longer than 10 seconds the force limiter is switched on again Window convenience operation First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 34 The electrically powered windows can be opened and closed as follows when un locking and locking the vehicle Opening gt Press and hold the unlock button 8 on the remote control key gt Hold
366. warn ings H on page 39 The fog lights with the function CORNER are designed to improve the illumination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when turning parking etc The fog lights with the function CORNER are adjusted according to the steering angle or after switching on the turn signal light in the following circumstances gt the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of maximum 40 km h gt the daytime running lights are not switched on gt the low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position AUTO and the intensity of the ambient light causes the low beam to be switched on gt the fog lights are not switched on gt no reverse gear is engaged i Note If the reverse gear is engaged during the active function CORNER both fog lights illuminate Rear fog light First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 39 Switching on gt First of all turn the light switch to position or 2D Fig 24 on page 42 gt Pull the light switch to position 2 If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights page 42 the rear fog light is switched on by turning the light switch to the position or 20 and is pulled out directly to the position 2 This switch does not have two positions but only one position The warning light 02 lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is switched on page 18 Only the
367. way Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the seat belts seat belt connections inertia reel or the lock is detected the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a SKODA specialist garage Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a SKODA specialist garage The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked i Note The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts The physical principle of a frontal collision Fig 112 Driver without a fastened seat belt rear seat passenger without a fastened seat belt First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 125 The physical principle of a frontal collision can be explained quite simply 126 Safety As soon as the vehicle is moving so called kinetic energy the energy of motion is produced both in terms of the car as well as in terms of the occupants The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants The greater the speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is nevertheless the most important factor Doubling th
368. wing applies if the airbag has been switched off using the key switch in the storage compartment gt The warning light comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been switch ed on gt Switching off the airbag is indicated by the lighting up of the warning light AIRBAG OFF airbag switched off in the middle of the dash panel page 133 F WARNING If there is a fault have the airbag system checked immediately by a KODA specialist garage Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident Tyre control display 0 The warning light lights up if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres Check and adjust the pressure in all tyres page 170 An audible signal sounds as a warning signal If the warning light 1 lights up there is a fault in the system Seek help from a SKODA specialist garage Further information page 175 Tyre control display 24 Using the system Note If the battery has been disconnected the warning light illuminates after the ig nition is switched on The warning light should go out after driving a short dis tance Windscreen washer fluid level amp If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low the warning light amp comes on Top up with liquid page 165 The following is displayed in the information display Top up wash fluid Switching off traction control system TCS lt The ASR is switched off by pre
369. y attention to the expiration date of the first aid kit We recommend using a first aid box from SKODA Original Accessories available from a SKODA Service Partner The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat On vehicles fitted with electrically adjustable seats the fire extinguisher is fas tened to a bracket underneath the front passenger seat Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguish er The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person on an annual ba sis the national legal provisions must be observed E WARNING The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants i Note The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant applicable national legal re quirements a Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher If the fire extin guisher is used after the expiration date its proper function is no longer assured The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only Vehicle tool kit Fig 147 Boot Storage compartment for vehicle too kit an Om VEN n The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack with sticker are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel Fig 147 or in the storage space for the spare wheel There is also space here for the remov
370. y pass through an automatic vehicle wash system Replacing the rear window wiper blade Pig 37 Rear window wiper blade First read and observe the introductory information and safety warn ings H on page 48 Removing the wiper blade gt Fold the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen and position the wiper blade at a right angle to the wiper arm Fig 37 gt Hold the windscreen wiper arm at the top end with one hand gt With the other hand unlock the locking button A in the direction of arrow and remove the wiper blade Attaching the wiper blade gt Position the wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lock the locking but ton a Fig 37 gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen Manual dimming interior mirror Basic setting gt Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward Lights and visibility 51 Dimming mirror gt Push the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror backwards Automatic dimming interior mirror Fig 38 Automatic dimming interior mir ror Switching on automatic dimming gt Press the button B Fig 38 the warning light A lights up Switching off automatic dimming gt Press the button B Fig 38 again the warning light A goes out If the automatic dimming is switched on the mirror dims automatically depend ing on the light striking the mirror from the rear The mirror has no lever on the b

- &scaron;koda auto

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents